[Code of Federal Regulations]

[Title 40, Volume 22]

[Revised as of July 1, 2005]

From the U.S. Government Printing Office via GPO Access

[CITE: 40CFR136.5]



[Page 39-339]

 

                   TITLE 40--PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT

 

         CHAPTER I--ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (CONTINUED)

 

PART 136_GUIDELINES ESTABLISHING TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE ANALYSIS OF 

POLLUTANTS--Table of Contents

 

Sec. 136.5  Approval of alternate test procedures.



    (a) The Regional Administrator of the region in which the discharge 

will occur has final responsibility for approval of any alternate test 

procedure proposed by the responsible person or firm making the 

discharge.

    (b) Within thirty days of receipt of an application, the Director 

will forward such application proposed by the responsible person or firm 

making the discharge, together with his recommendations, to the Regional 

Administrator. Where the Director recommends rejection of the 

application for scientific and technical reasons which he provides, the 

Regional Administrator shall deny the application,



[[Page 40]]



and shall forward a copy of the rejected application and his decision to 

the Director of the State Permit Program and to the Director of the 

Analytical Methods Staff, Washington, DC.

    (c) Before approving any application for an alternate test procedure 

proposed by the responsible person or firm making the discharge, the 

Regional Administrator shall forward a copy of the application to the 

Director of the Analytical Methods Staff, Washington, DC.

    (d) Within ninety days of receipt by the Regional Administrator of 

an application for an alternate test procedure, proposed by the 

responsible person or firm making the discharge, the Regional 

Administrator shall notify the applicant and the appropriate State 

agency of approval or rejection, or shall specify the additional 

information which is required to determine whether to approve the 

proposed test procedure. Prior to the expiration of such ninety day 

period, a recommendation providing the scientific and other technical 

basis for acceptance or rejection will be forwarded to the Regional 

Administrator by the Director of the Analytical Methods Staff, 

Washington, DC. A copy of all approval and rejection notifications will 

be forwarded to the Director, Analytical Methods Staff, Washington, DC, 

for the purposes of national coordination.

    (e) Approval for nationwide use. (1) Within sixty days of the 

receipt by the Director of the Analytical Methods Staff, Washington, DC, 

of an application for an alternate test procedure for nationwide use, 

the Director of the Analytical Methods Staff shall notify the applicant 

in writing whether the application is complete. If the application is 

incomplete, the applicant shall be informed of the information necessary 

to make the application complete.

    (2) Within ninety days of the receipt of a complete package, the 

Analytical Methods Staff shall perform any analysis necessary to 

determine whether the alternate method satisfies the applicable 

requirements of this part, and the Director of the Analytical Methods 

Staff shall recommend to the Administrator that he/she approve or reject 

the application and shall also notify the applicant of such 

recommendation.

    (3) As expeditiously as practicable, an alternate method determined 

by the Administrator to satisfy the applicable requirements of this part 

shall be proposed by EPA for incorporation in subsection 136.3 of 40 CFR 

part 136. EPA shall make available for review all the factual bases for 

its proposal, including any performance data submitted by the applicant 

and any available EPA analysis of those data.

    (4) Following a period of public comment, EPA shall, as 

expeditiously as practicable, publish in the Federal Register a final 

decision to approve or reject the alternate method.



[38 FR 28760, Oct. 16, 1973, as amended at 41 FR 52785, Dec. 1, 1976; 55 

FR 33440, Aug. 15, 1990; 62 FR 30763, June 5, 1997]



    Appendix A to Part 136--Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of 

                   Municipal and Industrial Wastewater



                    Method 601--Purgeable Halocarbons



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of 29 purgeable 

halocarbons.

    The following parameters may be determined by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                  STORET

                   Parameter                       No.        CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bromodichloromethane...........................    32101         75-27-4

Bromoform......................................    32104         75-25-2

Bromomethane...................................    34413         74-83-9

Carbon tetrachloride...........................    32102         56-23-5

Chlorobenzene..................................    34301        108-90-7

Chloroethane...................................    34311         75-00-3

2-Chloroethylvinyl ether.......................    34576        100-75-8

Chloroform.....................................    32106         67-66-3

Chloromethane..................................    34418         74-87-3

Dibromochloromethane...........................    32105        124-48-1

1,2-Dichlorobenzene............................    34536         95-50-1

1,3-Dichlorobenzene............................    34566        541-73-1

1,4-Dichlorobenzene............................    34571        106-46-7

Dichlorodifluoromethane........................    34668         75-71-8

1,1-Dichloroethane.............................    34496         75-34-3

1,2-Dichloroethane.............................    34531        107-06-2

1,1-Dichloroethane.............................    34501         75-35-4

trans-1,2-Dichloroethene.......................    34546        156-60-5

1,2-Dichloropropane............................    34541         78-87-5

cis-1,3-Dichloropropene........................    34704      10061-01-5

trans-1,3-Dichloropropene......................    34699      10061-02-6

Methylene chloride.............................    34423         75-09-2

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane......................    34516         79-34-5

Tetrachloroethene..............................    34475        127-18-4

1,1,1-Trichloroethane..........................    34506         71-55-6

1,1,2-Trichloroethane..........................    34511         79-00-5

Tetrachloroethene..............................    39180         79-01-6

Trichlorofluoromethane.........................    34488         75-69-4

Vinyl chloride.................................    39715         75-01-4

------------------------------------------------------------------------





[[Page 41]]



    1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chro ma tographic (GC) method 

applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in 

municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When 

this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the 

compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at 

least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes 

analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can 

be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 

provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions 

appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results 

for most of the parameters listed above.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1) 

1 for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a 

specific wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the 

nature of interferences in the sample matrix.

    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a 

gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each 

analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with 

this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in 

a specially-designed purging chamber at ambient temperature. The 

halocarbons are efficiently transferred from the aqueous phase to the 

vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the 

halocarbons are trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is heated 

and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the halocarbons onto a gas 

chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed 

to separate the halocarbons which are then detected with a halide-

specific detector.2, 3

    2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that 

may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from interferences 

that may occur.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compounds outgassing 

from the plumbing ahead of the trap account for the majority of 

contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be 

free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running 

laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-

Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers 

with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.

    3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics 

(particularly fluorocarbons and methylene chloride) through the septum 

seal ilto the sample during shipment and storage. A field reagent blank 

prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and 

handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination.

    3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and 

low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the 

purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed with reagent water 

between sample analyses. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is 

encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to 

check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of 

water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or 

high organohalide levels, it may be necessary to wash out the purging 

device with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and 

then dry it in a 105[deg]C oven between analyses. The trap and other 

parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, 

frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

4-6 for the information of the analyst.

    4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been 

tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian 

carcinogens: carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, and 

vinyl chloride. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be 

prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be 

worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic 

compounds.



[[Page 42]]



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.

    5.1.1 Vial--25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with 

a hole in the center (Pierce 13075 or equivalent). Detergent 

wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 [deg]C before 

use.

    5.1.2 Septum--Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce 12722 or 

equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry 

at 105 [deg]C for 1 h before use.

    5.2 Purge and trap system--The purge and trap system consists of 

three separate pieces of equipment: a purging device, trap, and 

desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.

    5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL samples 

with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between 

the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 

mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided 

bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas 

must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. 

The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.

    5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside 

diameter of at least 0.105 in. The trap must be packed to contain the 

following minimum lengths of adsorbents: 1.0 cm of methyl silicone 

coated packing (Section 6.3.3), 7.7 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer 

(Section 6.3.2), 7.7 cm of silica gel (Section 6.3.4), 7.7 cm of coconut 

charcoal (Section 6.3.1). If it is not necessary to analyze for 

dichlorodifluoromethane, the charcoal can be eliminated, and the polymer 

section lengthened to 15 cm. The minimum specifications for the trap are 

illustrated in Figure 2.

    5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 

180 [deg]C. The polymer section of the trap should not be heated higher 

than 180 [deg]C and the remaining sections should not exceed 200 [deg]C. 

The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.

    5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit 

or be coupled to a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Figures 3 and 4.

    5.3 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with a 

temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column 

injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical 

columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is 

recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.3.1 Column 1--8 ft long x 0.1 in. ID stainless steel or glass, 

packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack B (60/80 mesh) or equivalent. This 

column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 

12. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in 

Section 10.1.

    5.3.2 Column 2--6 ft long x 0.1 in. ID stainless steel or glass, 

packed with chemically bonded n-octane on Porasil-C (100/120 mesh) or 

equivalent.

    5.3.3 Detector--Electrolytic conductivity or microcoulometric 

detector. These types of detectors have proven effective in the analysis 

of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1). The 

electrolytic conductivity detector was used to develop the method 

performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of 

alternate detectors are provided in Section 10.1.

    5.4 Syringes--5-mL glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each), if 

applicable to the purging device.

    5.5 Micro syringes--25-[micro]L, 0.006 in. ID needle.

    5.6 Syringe valve--2-way, with Luer ends (three each).

    5.7 Syringe--5-mL, gas-tight with shut-off valve.

    5.8 Bottle--15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.

    5.9 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a 

carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-

300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).

    6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) 

may be used to generate reagent water.

    6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 

min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 [deg]C, 

bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While 

still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and 

seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.

    6.2 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.3 Trap Materials:

    6.3.1 Coconut charcoal--6/10 mesh sieved to 26 mesh, Barnabey 

Cheney, CA-580-26 lot  M-2649 or equivalent.

    6.3.2 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer--Tenax, (60/80 mesh), 

chromatographic grade or equivalent.

    6.3.3 Methyl silicone packing--3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) 

or equivalent.

    6.3.4 Silica gel--35/60 mesh, Davison, grade-15 or equivalent.

    6.4 Methanol--Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.5 Stock standard solutions--Stock standard solutions may be 

prepared from



[[Page 43]]



pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Prepare 

stock standard solutions in methanol using assayed liquids or gases as 

appropriate. Because of the toxicity of some of the organohalides, 

primary dilutions of these materials should be prepared in a hood. A 

NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst 

handles high concentrations of such materials.

    6.5.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground glass 

stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered, for 

about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted surfaces have dried. Weigh the 

flask to the learest 0.1 mg.

    6.5.2 Add the assayed reference material:

    6.5.2.1 Liquid--Using a 100 [micro]L syringe, immediately add two or 

more drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be 

sure that the drops fall directly into the alcohol without contacting 

the neck of the flask.

    6.5.2.2 Gases--To prepare standards for any of the six halocarbons 

that boil below 30 [deg] C (bromomethane, chloroethane, chloro methane, 

dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, vinyl chloride), fill a 

5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the reference standard to the 5.0-mL 

mark. Lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol meniscus. Slowly 

introduce the reference standard above the surface of the liquid (the 

heavy gas will rapidly dissolve into the methanol).

    6.5.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the 

flask several times. Calculate the concentration in [micro]g/[micro]L 

from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% 

or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

malufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.5.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottle. Store, with minimal headspace, at -10 to -20 [deg]C 

and protect from light.

    6.5.5 Prepare fresh standards weekly for the six gases and 2-

chloroethylvinyl ether. All other standards must be replaced after one 

month, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.6 Secondary dilution standards--Using stock standard solutions, 

prepare secondary dilution standards in methanol that contain the 

compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary 

dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the 

aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will 

bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary dilution 

standards should be stored with minimal headspace and should be checked 

frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just 

prior to preparing calibration standards from them.

    6.7 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications 

in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 [deg]C by 

backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the 

trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.

    7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The 

gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate 

conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and 

trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard 

technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 

7.4).

    7.3 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a miminum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 

[micro]L of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 

1000 [micro]L of reagent water. A 25-[micro]L syringe with a 0.006 in. 

ID needle should be used for this operation. One of the external 

standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 

1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range 

of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working 

range of the detector. These aqueous standards can be stored up to 24 h, 

if held in sealed vials with zero headspace as described in Section 9.2. 

If not so stored, they must be discarded after 1 h.

    7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and 

tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration in the 

standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for 

each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration 

(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative 

standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed 

and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a 

calibration curve.

    7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples. The compounds recommended for use as surrogate spikes in 

Section 8.7 have been used successfully as internal standards, because 

of their generally unique retention times.



[[Page 44]]



    7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in 

Section 7.3.1.

    7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal 

standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.5 and 6.6. It is 

recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a 

concentration of 15 [micro]g/mL of each internal standard compound. The 

addition of 10 [micro]L of this standard to 5.0 mL of sample or 

calibration standard would be equivalent to 30 [micro]g/L.

    7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, 

adding 10 [micro]L of internal standard spiking solution directly to the 

syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against 

concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate 

response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.094



                                                              Equation 1

where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard.

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured.



If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF 

can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.

    7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.

    7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.

    7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the 

corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the 

responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated 

ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls 

outside the range, proceed according to Section 7.5.4.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will not meet the calibration 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    7.5.4 Repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet 

the calibration acceptance criteria. If the response for a parameter 

does not fall within the range in this second test, a new calibration 

curve, calibration factor, or RF must be prepared for that parameter 

according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of 

measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the 

analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to 

demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under 

control.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 10 [micro]g/

mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from 

the U.S.



[[Page 45]]



Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that 

source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another 

external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check 

sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock 

standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.

    8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 20 [micro]g/L of each 

parameter by adding 200 [micro]L of QC check sample concentrate to 100 

mL of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample 

according to Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

of interest using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 2. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, then the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of 

the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 

8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.

    8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the 

test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.

    8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat the test only for those 

parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will 

confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, 

locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all 

compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 20 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 

[micro]L of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine 

the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.7 If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than 

20 [micro]g/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria in 

Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the specific 

spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance criteria for the 

recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation 

in Table 3, substituting the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) 

calculate overall precision (S') using the equation in Table 3, 

substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike 

concentration as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/

T)%.7

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 2 must be measured 

in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC 

check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check 

standard should be routinely analyzed with the spiked sample.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 [micro]L of QC 

check sample concentrate



[[Page 46]]



(Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent water. The QC check standard 

needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in 

Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If p=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.

    8.7 The analyst should monitor both the performance of the 

analytical system and the effectiveness of the method in deal ing with 

each sample matrix by spiking each sample, standard, and reagent water 

blank with surrogate halocarbons. A combination of bromochloromethane, 

2-bromo-1-chloropropane, and 1,4-dichlorobu tane is recommended to 

encompass the range of the temperature program used in this method. From 

stock standard solutions prepared as in Section 6.5, add a volume to 

give 750 [micro]g of each surrogate to 45 mL of reagent water contained 

in a 50-mL volumetric flask, mix and dilute to volume for a 

concentration of 15 ng/[micro]L. Add 10 [micro]L of this surrogate 

spiking solution directly into the 5-mL syringe with every sample and 

reference standard analyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate spiking solution 

on a weekly basis. If the internal standard calibration procedure is 

being used, the surrogate compounds may be added directly to the 

internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2).



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 All samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of 

collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined 

chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient 

for up to 5 ppm Cl2) to the empty sample bottle just prior to 

shipping to the sampling site. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used 

for measurement of residual chlorine.8 Field test kits are 

available for this purpose.

    9.2 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers having a 

total volume of at least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle just to 

overflowing in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the sample 

as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air bubbles 

are entrapped in it. If preservative has been added, shake vigorously 

for 1 min. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of 

analysis.

    9.3 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of 

collection.3



                              10. Procedure



    10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times 

and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the 

separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 5. Other packed 

columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the 

requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/

min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and 

trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the 

purging device sample introduction needle.

    10.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature prior to 

introducing it to the syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe 

and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) 

and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of 

overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open 

the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample 

volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the 

validity of the sample for future



[[Page 47]]



analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this time to 

protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 [micro]L of the 

surrogate spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 10.0 [micro]L of the 

internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), if applicable, 

through the valve bore, then close the valve.

    10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve 

on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample 

into the purging chamber.

    10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 11.00.1 min at ambient temperature.

    10.7 After the 11-min purge time, attach the trap to the 

chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode 

(Figure 4), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. 

Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the 

trap to 180 [deg]C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 

20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid heating of the trap cannot be 

achieved, the GC column must be used as a secondary trap by cooling it 

to 30 [deg]C (subambient temperature, if poor peak geometry or random 

retention time problems persist) instead of the initial program 

temperature of 45 [deg]C

    10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph, 

empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash 

the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.

    10.9 After desorbing the sample for 4 min, recondition the trap by 

returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s then 

close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through 

the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 180 [deg]C After 

approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve 

to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next 

sample can be analyzed.

    10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    10.11 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, prepare a dilution of the sample with reagent water from the 

aliquot in the second syringe and reanalyze.



                            11. Calculations



    11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the 

peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor 

determined in Section 7.3.2.

    11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.

                                                              Equation 2

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.095



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard.



    11.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         12. Method Performance



    12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and re ported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero. \1\ The MDL concentration 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.11. 

Similar results were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL 

actu ally achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.



    12.2 This method is recommended for use in the concentration range 

from the MDL to 1000xMDL. Direct aqueous injection techniques should be 

used to measure concentration levels above 1000xMDL.

    12.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 8.0 to 500 [micro]g/L.9 

Single operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were 

found to be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. ``Determining Volatile 

Organics at Microgram-per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,'' Journal 

of the American Water Works Association, 66, 739 (1974).

    3. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. ``Semi-Automated Headspace 

Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for



[[Page 48]]



Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds,'' Proceedings from Symposium on 

Measurement of Organic Pollutants in Water and Wastewater, American 

Society for Testing and Materials, STP 686, C.E. Van Hall, editor, 1978.

    4. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    8. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA 600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    9. ``EPA Method Study 24, Method 601--Purgeable Halocarbons by the 

Purge and Trap Method,'' EPA 600/4-84-064, National Technical 

Information Service, PB84-212448, Springfield, Virginia 22161, July 

1984.

    10. ``Method Validation Data for EPA Method 601,'' Memorandum from 

B. Potter, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, November 10, 

1983.

    11. Bellar, T. A., Unpublished data, U.S. Environmental Protection 

Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, 

Ohio 45268, 1981.



                         Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Retention time (min)         Method detection

                         Parameter                         ------------------------------------ limit ([micro]g/

                                                                Column 1          Column 2             L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Chloromethane.............................................         1.50              5.28              0.08

Bromomethane..............................................         2.17              7.05              1.18

Dichlorodifluoromethane...................................         2.62             nd                 1.81

Vinyl chloride............................................         2.67              5.28              0.18

Chloroethane..............................................         3.33              8.68              0.52

Methylene chloride........................................         5.25             10.1               0.25

Trichlorofluoromethane....................................         7.18             nd                nd

1,1-Dichloroethene........................................         7.93              7.72              0.13

1,1-Dichloroethane........................................         9.30             12.6               0.07

trans-1,2-Dichloroethene..................................        10.1               9.38              0.10

Chloroform................................................        10.7              12.1               0.05

1,2-Dichloroethane........................................        11.4              15.4               0.03

1,1,1-Trichloroethane.....................................        12.6              13.1               0.03

Carbon tetrachloride......................................        13.0              14.4               0.12

Bromodichloromethane......................................        13.7              14.6               0.10

1,2-Dichloropropane.......................................        14.9              16.6               0.04

cis-1,3-Dichloropropene...................................        15.2              16.6               0.34

Trichloroethene...........................................        15.8              13.1               0.12

Dibromochloromethane......................................        16.5              16.6               0.09

1,1,2-Trichloroethane.....................................        16.5              18.1               0.02

trans-1,3-Dichloropropene.................................        16.5              18.0               0.20

2-Chloroethylvinyl ether..................................        18.0              nd                 0.13

Bromoform.................................................        19.2              19.2               0.20

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane.................................        21.6              nd                 0.03

Tetrachloroethene.........................................        21.7              15.0               0.03

Chlorobenzene.............................................        24.2              18.8               0.25

1,3-Dichlorobenzene.......................................        34.0              22.4               0.32

1,2-Dichlorobenzene.......................................        34.9              23.5               0.15

1,4-Dichlorobenzene.......................................        35.4              22.3               0.24

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column 1 conditions: Carbopack B (60/80 mesh) coated with 1% SP-1000 packed in an 8 ft x 0.1 in. ID stainless

  steel or glass column with helium carrier gas at 40 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held at 45 [deg]C for

  3 min then programmed at 8 [deg]C/min to 220 [deg]C and held for 15 min.

Column 2 conditions: Porisil-C (100/120 mesh) coated with n-octane packed in a 6 ft x 0.1 in. ID stainless steel

  or glass column with helium carrier gas at 40 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held at 50 [deg]C for 3 min

  then programmed at 6 [deg]C/min to 170 [deg]C and held for 4 min.

nd=not determined.





[[Page 49]]





                          Table 2--Calibration and QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 601 a

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                           Limit for

                                                            Range for Q        s        Range for X    Range P,

                        Parameter                          ([micro]g/L)   ([micro]g/   ([micro]g/L)     Ps (%)

                                                                              L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bromodichloromethane....................................       15.2-24.8         4.3       10.7-32.0      42-172

Bromoform...............................................       14.7-25.3         4.7        5.0-29.3      13-159

Bromomethane............................................       11.7-28.3         7.6        3.4-24.5       D-144

Carbon tetrachloride....................................       13.7-26.3         5.6       11.8-25.3      43-143

Chlorobenzene...........................................       14.4-25.6         5.0       10.2-27.4      38-150

Chloroethane............................................       15.4-24.6         4.4       11.3-25.2      46-137

2-Chloroethylvinyl ether................................       12.0-28.0         8.3        4.5-35.5      14-186

Chloroform..............................................       15.0-25.0         4.5       12.4-24.0      49-133

Chloromethane...........................................       11.9-28.1         7.4          D-34.9       D-193

Dibromochloromethane....................................       13.1-26.9         6.3        7.9-35.1      24-191

1,2-Dichlorobenzene.....................................       14.0-26.0         5.5        1.7-38.9       D-208

1,3-Dichlorobenzene.....................................        9.9-30.1         9.1        6.2-32.6       7-187

1,4-Dichlorobenzene.....................................       13.9-26.1         5.5       11.5-25.5      42-143

1,1-Dichloroethane......................................       16.8-23.2         3.2       11.2-24.6      47-132

1,2-Dichloroethane......................................       14.3-25.7         5.2       13.0-26.5      51-147

1,1-Dichloroethene......................................       12.6-27.4         6.6       10.2-27.3      28-167

trans-1,2-Dichloroethene................................       12.8-27.2         6.4       11.4-27.1      38-155

1,2-Dichloropropane.....................................       14.8-25.2         5.2       10.1-29.9      44-156

cis-1,3-Dichloropropene.................................       12.8-27.2         7.3        6.2-33.8      22-178

trans-1,3-Dichloropropene...............................       12.8-27.2         7.3        6.2-33.8      22-178

Methylene chloride......................................       15.5-24.5         4.0        7.0-27.6      25-162

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane...............................        9.8-30.2         9.2        6.6-31.8       8-184

Tetrachloroethene.......................................       14.0-26.0         5.4        8.1-29.6      26-162

1,1,1-Trichloroethane...................................       14.2-25.8         4.9       10.8-24.8      41-138

1,1,2-Trichloroethane...................................       15.7-24.3         3.9        9.6-25.4      39-136

Trichloroethene.........................................       15.4-24.6         4.2        9.2-26.6      35-146

Trichlorofluoromethane..................................       13.3-26.7         6.0        7.4-28.1      21-156

Vinyl chloride..........................................       13.7-26.3         5.7        8.2-29.9      28-163

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

a Criteria were calculated assuming a QC check sample concentration of 20 [micro]g/L.

Q=Concentration measured in QC check sample, in [micro]g/L (Section 7.5.3).

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 601

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                     Single analyst

              Parameter                Accuracy, as recovery,        precision, sr'       Overall precision, S'

                                           X' ([micro]g/L)            ([micro]g/L)             ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bromodichloromethane................  1.12C-1.02                0.11X+0.04               0.20X+1.00

Bromoform...........................  0.96C-2.05                0.12X+0.58               0.21X+2.41

Bromomethane........................  0.76C-1.27                0.28X+0.27               0.36X+0.94

Carbon tetrachloride................  0.98C-1.04                0.15X+0.38               0.20X+0.39

Chlorobenzene.......................  1.00C-1.23                0.15X-0.02               0.18X+1.21

Choroethane.........................  0.99C-1.53                0.14X-0.13               0.17X+0.63

2-Chloroethylvinyl ether a..........  1.00C                     0.20X                    0.35X

Chloroform..........................  0.93C-0.39                0.13X+0.15               0.19X-0.02

Chloromethane.......................  0.77C+0.18                0.28X-0.31               0.52X+1.31

Dibromochloromethane................  0.94C+2.72                0.11X+1.10               0.24X+1.68

1,2-Dichlorobenzene.................  0.93C+1.70                0.20X+0.97               0.13X+6.13

1,3-Dichlorobenzene.................  0.95C+0.43                0.14X+2.33               0.26X+2.34

1,4-Dichlorobenzene.................  0.93C-0.09                0.15X+0.29               0.20X+0.41

1,1-Dichloroethane..................  0.95C-1.08                0.09X+0.17               0.14X+0.94

1,2-Dichloroethane..................  1.04C-1.06                0.11X+0.70               0.15X+0.94

1,1-Dichloroethene..................  0.98C-0.87                0.21X-0.23               0.29X-0.40

trans-1,2-Dichloroethene............  0.97C-0.16                0.11X+1.46               0.17X+1.46

1,2-Dichloropropane a...............  1.00C                     0.13X                    0.23X

cis-1,3-Dichloropropene a...........  1.00C                     0.18X                    0.32X

trans-1,3-Dichloropropene a.........  1.00C                     0.18X                    0.32X

Methylene chloride..................  0.91C-0.93                0.11X+0.33               0.21X+1.43

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethene...........  0.95C+0.19                0.14X+2.41               0.23X+2.79

Tetrachloroethene...................  0.94C+0.06                0.14X+0.38               0.18X+2.21

1,1,1-Trichloroethane...............  0.90C-0.16                0.15X+0.04               0.20X+0.37

1,1,2-Trichloroethane...............  0.86C+0.30                0.13X-0.14               0.19X+0.67

Trichloroethene.....................  0.87C+0.48                0.13X-0.03               0.23X+0.30

Trichlorofluoromethane..............  0.89C-0.07                0.15X+0.67               0.26X+0.91

Vinyl chloride......................  0.97C-0.36                0.13X+0.65               0.27X+0.40

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.



[[Page 50]]





sn'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S\1\=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

a Estimates based upon the performance in a single laboratory.\10\



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.000





[[Page 51]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.001





[[Page 52]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.002





[[Page 53]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.003





[[Page 54]]



                     Method 602--Purgeable Aromatics



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of various purgeable 

aromatics. The following parameters may be determined by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                    STORET

                    Parameter                         No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzene..........................................     34030      71-43-2

Chlorobenzene....................................     34301     108-90-7

1,2-Dichlorobenzene..............................     34536      95-50-1

1,3-Dichlorobenzene..............................     34566     541-73-1

1,4-Dichlorobenzene..............................     34571     106-46-7

Ethylbenzene.....................................     34371     100-41-4

Toluene..........................................     34010     108-88-3

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic (GC) method 

applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in 

municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When 

this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the 

compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at 

least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes 

analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can 

be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 

provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions 

appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results 

for all of the parameters listed above.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1) 

1 for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a 

specific wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the 

nature of interferences in the sample matrix.

    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a 

gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each 

analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with 

this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in 

a specially-designed purging chamber at ambient temperature. The 

aromatics are efficiently transferred from the aqueous phase to the 

vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the 

aromatics are trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is heated 

and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the aromatics onto a gas 

chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed 

to separate the aromatics which are then detected with a photoionization 

detector.2, 3

    2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that 

may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from interferences 

that may occur.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compounds outgassing 

from the plumbing ahead of the trap account for the majority of 

contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be 

free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running 

laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-

Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers 

with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.

    3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics 

through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage. A 

field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the 

sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such 

contamination.

    3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and 

low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the 

purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed with reagent water 

between sample analyses. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is 

encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to 

check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of 

water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or 

high aromatic levels, it may be necessary to wash the purging device 

with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry 

it in an oven at 105 [deg]C between analyses. The trap and other parts 

of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, frequent 

bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety



[[Page 55]]



are available and have been identified 4-6 for the 

information of the analyst.

    4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been 

tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mam malian 

carcinogens: benzene and 1,4- dichlorobenzene. Primary standards of 

these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA 

approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles 

high con centrations of these toxic compounds.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.

    5.1.1 Vial]25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with 

a hole in the center (Pierce 13075 or equivalent). Detergent 

wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 [deg]C before 

use.

    5.1.2 Septum--Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce 12722 or 

equivalent). Deter gent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and 

dry at 105 [deg]C for 1 h before use.

    5.2 Purge and trap system--The purge and trap system consists of 

three separate pieces of equipment: A purging device, trap, and 

desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.

    5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL samples 

with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between 

the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 

mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided 

bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas 

must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. 

The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.

    5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside 

diameter of at least 0.105 in.

    5.2.2.1 The trap is packed with 1 cm of methyl silicone coated 

packing (Section 6.4.2) and 23 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer 

(Section 6.4.1) as shown in Figure 2. This trap was used to develop the 

method performance statements in Section 12.

    5.2.2.2 Alternatively, either of the two traps described in Method 

601 may be used, although water vapor will preclude the measurement of 

low concentrations of benzene.

    5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 

180 [deg]C. The polymer section of the trap should not be heated higher 

than 180 [deg]C and the remaining sections should not exceed 200 [deg]C. 

The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.

    5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit 

or be coupled to a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Figures 3, 4, and 

5.

    5.3 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with a 

temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column 

injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical 

columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is 

recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.3.1 Column 1--6 ft long x 0.082 in. ID stainless steel or glass, 

packed with 5% SP-1200 and 1.75% Bentone-34 on Supelcoport (100/120 

mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method 

performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of 

alternate column packings are provided in Section 10.1.

    5.3.2 Column 2--8 ft long x 0.1 in ID stainless steel or glass, 

packed with 5% 1,2,3-Tris(2-cyanoethoxy)propane on Chromosorb W-AW (60/

80 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.3.3 Detector--Photoionization detector (h-Nu Systems, Inc. Model 

PI-51-02 or equivalent). This type of detector has been proven effective 

in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope 

(Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements 

in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are 

provided in Section 10.1.

    5.4 Syringes--5-mL glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each), if 

applicable to the purging device.

    5.5 Micro syringes--25-[micro]L, 0.006 in. ID needle.

    5.6 Syringe valve--2-way, with Luer ends (three each).

    5.7 Bottle--15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.

    5.8 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a 

carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-

300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).

    6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) 

may be used to generate reagent water.

    6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 

min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 [deg]C, 

bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While 

still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and 

seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.

    6.2 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.3 Hydrochloric acid (1+1)--Add 50 mL of concentrated HCl (ACS) to 

50 mL of reagent water.

    6.4 Trap Materials:



[[Page 56]]



    6.4.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer--Tenax, (60/80 mesh), 

chromatographic grade or equiv alent.

    6.4.2 Methyl silicone packing--3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) 

or equivalent.

    6.5 Methanol--Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.6 Stock standard solutions--Stock stand ard solutions may be 

prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified 

solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in methanol using assayed 

liquids. Because of the toxicity of benzene and 1,4-dichloro benzene, 

primary dilutions of these mate rials should be prepared in a hood. A 

NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst 

handles high concentrations of such materials.

    6.6.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground glass 

stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered, for 

about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted surfaces have dried. Weigh the 

flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.

    6.6.2 Using a 100-[micro]L syringe, immediately add two or more 

drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure 

that the drops fall directly into the alcohol without contacting the 

neck of the flask.

    6.6.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the 

flask several times. Calculate the concentration in [micro]g/[micro]L 

from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% 

or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.6.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottle. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light.

    6.6.5 All standards must be replaced after one month, or sooner if 

comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.7 Secondary dilution standards--Using stock standard solutions, 

prepare secondary dilution standards in methanol that contain the 

compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary 

dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the 

aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will 

bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary solution 

standards must be stored with zero headspace and should be checked 

frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just 

prior to preparing calibration standards from them.

    6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications 

in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 [deg]C by 

backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the 

trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.

    7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The 

gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate 

conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and 

trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard 

technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 

7.4).

    7.3 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 

[micro]L of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 

1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-[micro]L syringe with a 0.006 in. ID 

needle should be used for this operation. One of the external standards 

should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the 

other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of 

concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range 

of the detector. These aqueous standards must be prepared fresh daily.

    7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and 

tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration in the 

standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for 

each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration 

(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative 

standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed 

and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a 

calibration curve.

    7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples. The compound, [alpha],[alpha],[alpha],-trifluorotoluene, 

recommended as a surrogate spiking compound in Section 8.7 has been used 

successfully as an internal standard.

    7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in 

Section 7.3.1.

    7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal 

standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7. It is 

recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a 

concentration of 15 [micro]g/mL of each internal standard compound. The 

addition of 10 [micro]l of this



[[Page 57]]



standard to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration standard would be equivalent 

to 30 [micro]g/L.

    7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, 

adding 10 [micro]L of internal standard spiking solution directly to the 

syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against 

concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate 

response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.





                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------





                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured.



If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF 

can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.

    7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.

    7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.

    7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the 

corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the 

responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated 

ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls 

outside the range, a new calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF 

must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The mimimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of 

measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the 

analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to 

demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under 

control.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 10 [micro]g/

mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from 

the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and 

Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available 

from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from 

another external source. If not available from either source above, the 

QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using 

stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.

    8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 20 [micro]g/L of each 

parameter by adding 200 [micro]L of QC check sample concentrate to 100 

mL of reagant water.

    8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample 

according to Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

of interest using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria



[[Page 58]]



for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in Table 2. If s and X 

for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance criteria, the system 

performance is acceptable and analysis of actual samples can begin. If 

any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individual X falls 

outside the range for accuracy, the system performance is unacceptable 

for that parameter.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of 

the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 

8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.

    8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the 

test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.

    8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat the test only for those 

parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will 

confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, 

locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all 

compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 20 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 

[micro]L of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine 

the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\7\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than 20 

[micro]g/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria in 

Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the specific 

spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance criteria for the 

recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation 

in Table 3, substituting the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) 

calculate overall precision (S') using the equation in Table 3, 

substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike 

concentration as (100 X'/T) 2.44(100 S'/T)%.\7\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 [micro]L of QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent 

water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that 

failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P)



[[Page 59]]



and the standard deviation of the percent recovery (sp). 

Express the accuracy assessment as a percent recovery interval from P-

2sp to P+2sp. If P=90% and sp=10%, for 

example, the accuracy interval is expressed as 70-110%. Update the 

accuracy assessment for each parameter on a regular basis (e.g. after 

each five to ten new accuracy measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.

    8.7 The analyst should monitor both the performance of the 

analytical system and the effectiveness of the method in dealing with 

each sample matrix by spiking each sample, standard, and reagent water 

blank with surrogate compounds (e.g. [alpha], [alpha], [alpha],-

trifluorotoluene) that encompass the range of the temperature program 

used in this method. From stock standard solutions prepared as in 

Section 6.6, add a volume to give 750 [micro]g of each surrogate to 45 

mL of reagent water contained in a 50-mL volumetric flask, mix and 

dilute to volume for a concentration of 15 mg/[micro]L. Add 10 [micro]L 

of this surrogate spiking solution directly into the 5-mL syringe with 

every sample and reference standard analyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate 

spiking solution on a weekly basis. If the internal standard calibration 

procedure is being used, the surrogate compounds may be added directly 

to the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2).



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 The samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of 

collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined 

chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient 

for up to 5 ppm Cl2) to the empty sample bottle just prior to 

shipping to the sampling site. EPA Method 330.4 or 330.5 may be used for 

measurement of residual chlorine.8 Field test kits are 

available for this purpose.

    9.2 Collect about 500 mL of sample in a clean container. Adjust the 

pH of the sample to about 2 by adding 1+1 HCl while stirring. Fill the 

sample bottle in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the 

sample as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air 

bubbles are entrapped in it. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample 

bottle until time of analysis.

    9.3 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of 

collection.3



                              10. Procedure



    10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chrom atograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times 

and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An ex ample of the 

separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 6. Other packed 

columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the 

requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/

min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and 

trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the 

purging device sample introduction needle.

    10.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature prior to 

introducing it to the syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe 

and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) 

and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of 

overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open 

the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample 

volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the 

validity of the sample for future analysis, the analyst should fill a 

second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. 

Add 10.0 [micro]L of the surrogate spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 

10.0 [micro]L of the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), 

if applicable, through the valve bore, then close the valve.

    10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve 

on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample 

into the purging chamber.

    10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 12.00.1 min at ambient temperature.

    10.7 After the 12-min purge time, disconnect the purging device from 

the trap. Dry the trap by maintaining a flow of 40 mL/min of dry purge 

gas through it for 6 min (Figure 4). If the purging device has no 

provision for bypassing the purger for this step, a dry purger should be 

inserted into the device to minimize moisture in the gas. Attach the 

trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the 

desorb mode (Figure 5), and begin to temperature program the gas 

chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by 

rapidly heating the trap to 180 [deg]C while backflushing the trap with 

an inert gas between 20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid heating of the 

trap cannot be achieved, the GC column must be used as



[[Page 60]]



a secondary trap by cooling it to 30 [deg]C (subambient temperature, if 

poor peak geometry and random retention time problems persist) instead 

of the initial program temperature of 50 [deg]C.

    10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph 

column, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. 

Wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.

    10.9 After desorbing the sample for 4 min, recondition the trap by 

returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s, then 

close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through 

the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 180 [deg]C. After 

approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve 

to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next 

sample can be analyzed.

    10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    10.11 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, prepare a dilution of the sample with reagent water from the 

aliquot in the second syringe and reanalyze.



                            11. Calculations



    11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the 

peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor 

determined in Section 7.3.2.

    11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.096



    Equation 2

where:

As = Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais = Response for the internal standard.

Cis = Concentration of the internal standard.



    11.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         12. Method Performance



    12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.1 The MDL 

concentrations listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent 

water.9 Similar results were achieved using representative 

wastewaters. The MDL actually achieved in a given analysis will vary 

depending on instrument sensitivity and matrix effects.

    12.2 This method has been demonstrated to be applicable for the 

concentration range from the MDL to 100 x MDL.9 Direct 

aqueous injection techniques should be used to measure concentration 

levels above 1000 x MDL.

    12.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 2.1 to 550 [micro]g/L.9 

Single operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were 

found to be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. Lichtenberg, J.J. ``Determining Volatile Organics at Microgram-

per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,'' Journal American Water Works 

Association, 66, 739 (1974).

    3. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. ``Semi-Automated Headspace 

Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable Volatile 

Organic Compounds,'' Proceedings of Symposium on Measurement of Organic 

Pollutants in Water and Wastewater. American Society for Testing and 

Materials, STP 686, C.E. Van Hall, editor, 1978.

    4. ``Carcinogens--Working with Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3. is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)



[[Page 61]]



    8.``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development, 

Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268. 

March 1979.

    9. ``EPA Method Study 25, Method 602, Purgeable Aromatics,'' EPA 

600/4-84-042, National Technical Information Service, PB84-196682, 

Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1984.



     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                        Retention time (min)    Method

                                       ----------------------  detection

               Parameter                                         limit

                                         Column 1   Column 2  ([micro]g/

                                                                  L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzene...............................       3.33       2.75        0.2

Toluene...............................       5.75       4.25        0.2

Ethylbenzene..........................       8.25       6.25        0.2

Chlorobenzene.........................       9.17       8.02        0.2

1,4-Dichlorobenzene...................      16.8       16.2         0.3

1,3-Dichlorobenzene...................      18.2       15.0         0.4

1,2-Dichlorobenzene...................      25.9       19.4         0.4

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column 1 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 5% SP-1200/

  1.75% Bentone-34 packed in a 6 ft x 0.085 in. ID stainless steel

  column with helium carrier gas at 36 mL/min flow rate. Column

  temperature held at 50 [deg]C for 2 min then programmed at 6 [deg]C/

  min to 90 [deg]C for a final hold.

Column 2 conditions: Chromosorb W-AW (60/80 mesh) coated with 5% 1,2,3-

  Tris(2-cyanoethyoxy)propane packed in a 6 ft x 0.085 in. ID stainless

  steel column with helium carrier gas at 30 mL/min flow rate. Column

  temperature held at 40 [deg]C for 2 min then programmed at 2 [deg]C/

  min to 100 [deg]C for a final hold.





                          Table 2--Calibration and QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 602 a

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                               Limit for  Range for X

                                                                 Range for Q       s       ([micro]g/  Range for

                           Parameter                              ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/       L)       P, Ps(%)

                                                                      L)          L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzene........................................................    15.4-24.6        4.1     10.0-27.9     39-150

Chlorobenzene..................................................    16.1-23.9        3.5     12.7-25.4     55-135

1,2-Dichlorobenzene............................................    13.6-26.4        5.8     10.6-27.6     37-154

1,3-Dichlorobenzene............................................    14.5-25.5        5.0     12.8-25.5     50-141

1,4-Dichlorobenzene............................................    13.9-26.1        5.5     11.6-25.5     42-143

Ethylbenzene...................................................    12.6-27.4        6.7     10.0-28.2     32-160

Toluene........................................................    15.5-24.5        4.0     11.2-27.7     46-148

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Q=Concentration measured in QC check sample, in [micro]g/L (Section 7.5.3).

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

Ps, P=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

a Criteria were calculated assuming a QC check sample concentration of 20 [micro]g/L.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 602

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Accuracy, as   Single analyst      Overall

                            Parameter                              recovery, X'    precision, s'   precision, S'

                                                                   ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzene.........................................................      0.92C+0.57      0.09X+0.59      0.21X+0.56

Chlorobenzene...................................................      0.95C+0.02      0.09X+0.23      0.17X+0.10

1,2-Dichlorobenzene.............................................      0.93C+0.52      0.17X-0.04      0.22X+0.53

1,3-Dichlorobenzene.............................................      0.96C-0.05      0.15X-0.10      0.19X+0.09

1,4-Dichlorobenzene.............................................      0.93C-0.09      0.15X+0.28      0.20X+0.41

Ethylbenzene....................................................      0.94C+0.31      0.17X+0.46      0.26X+0.23

Toluene.........................................................      0.94C+0.65      0.09X+0.48      0.18X+0.71

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in X

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the Concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 62]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.004





[[Page 63]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.005





[[Page 64]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.006





[[Page 65]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.007





[[Page 66]]



                 Method 603--Acrolein and Acrylonitrile



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of acrolein and 

acrylonitrile. The following parameters may be determined by this 

method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                    STORET

                    Parameter                         No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Acrolein.........................................     34210     107-02-8

Acrylonitrile....................................     34215     107-13-1

------------------------------------------------------------------------





    1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic (GC) method 

applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in 

municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When 

this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for either or both of 

the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at 

least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes 

analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can 

be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 

provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions 

appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results 

for the parameters listed above, if used with the purge and trap 

conditions described in this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1) 

1 for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a 

specific wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the 

nature of interferences in the sample matrix.

    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a 

gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each 

analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with 

this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in 

a heated purging chamber. Acrolein and acrylonitrile are transferred 

from the aqueous phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a 

sorbent trap where the analytes are trapped. After the purge is 

completed, the trap is heated and backflushed with the inert gas to 

desorb the compound onto a gas chromatographic column. The gas 

chromatograph is temperature programmed to separate the analytes which 

are then detected with a flame ionization detector.2, 3

    2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that 

may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from the 

interferences that may occur.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compound outgassing from 

the plumbing of the trap account for the majority of contamination 

problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be free from 

contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-Teflon 

plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers with 

rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.

    3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics 

through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage. A 

field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the 

sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such 

contamination.

    3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and 

low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the 

purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed between samples with 

reagent water. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, 

it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to check for cross 

contamination. For samples containing large amounts of water-soluble 

materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or high analyte 

levels, it may be necessary to wash the purging device with a detergent 

solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it in an oven at 

105 [deg]C between analyses. The trap and other parts of the system are 

also subject to contamination, therefore, frequent bakeout and purging 

of the entire system may be required.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this view point, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

4, 6 for the information of the analyst.



[[Page 67]]



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.

    5.1.1 Vial--25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with 

a hole in the center (Pierce 13075 or equivalent). Detergent 

wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 [deg]C before 

use.

    5.1.2 Septum--Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce 12722 or 

equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water and dry 

at 105 [deg]C for 1 h before use.

    5.2 Purge and trap system--The purge and trap system consists of 

three separate pieces of equipment: a purging device, trap, and 

desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.

    5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL, samples 

with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between 

the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 

mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided 

bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas 

must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. 

The purging device must be capable of being heated to 85 [deg]C within 

3.0 min after transfer of the sample to the purging device and being 

held at 85 2 [deg]C during the purge cycle. The 

entire water column in the purging device must be heated. Design of this 

modification to the standard purging device is optional, however, use of 

a water bath is suggested.

    5.2.1.1 Heating mantle--To be used to heat water bath.

    5.2.1.2 Temperature controller--Equipped with thermocouple/sensor to 

accurately control water bath temperature to 2 

[deg]C. The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design 

criteria.

    5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside 

diameter of at least 0.105 in. The trap must be packed to contain 1.0 cm 

of methyl silicone coated packing (Section 6.5.2) and 23 cm of 2,6-

diphenylene oxide polymer (Section 6.5.1). The minimum specifications 

for the trap are illustrated in Figure 2.

    5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 

180 [deg]C, The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design 

criteria.

    5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit 

as illustrated in Figure 3 or be coupled to a gas chromatograph.

    5.3 pH paper--Narrow pH range, about 3.5 to 5.5 (Fisher Scientific 

Short Range Alkacid No. 2, 14-837-2 or equivalent).

    5.4 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with a 

temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column 

injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical 

columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is 

recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.4.1 Column 1--10 ft long x 2 mm ID glass or stainless steel, 

packed with Porapak-QS (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used 

to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines 

for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 10.1.

    5.4.2 Column 2--6 ft long x 0.1 in. ID glass or stainless steel, 

packed with Chromosorb 101 (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.4.3 Detector--Flame ionization detector. This type of detector has 

proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters 

listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method 

performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of 

alternate detectors are provided in Section 10.1.

    5.5 Syringes--5-mL, glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each).

    5.6 Micro syringes--25-[micro]L, 0.006 in. ID needle.

    5.7 Syringe valve--2-way, with Luer ends (three each).

    5.8 Bottle--15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.

    5.9 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a 

carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-

300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).

    6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) 

may be used to generate reagent water.

    6.1.3 Regent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 min. 

Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 [deg]C, bubble a 

contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While still hot, 

transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and seal with a 

Teflon-lined septum and cap.

    6.2 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.4 Hydrochloric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL of concentrated HCl 

(ACS) to 50 mL of reagent water.

    6.5 Trap Materials:

    6.5.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer--Tenax (60/80 mesh), 

chromatographic grade or equivalent.

    6.5.2 Methyl silicone packing--3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) 

or equivalent.



[[Page 68]]



    6.6 Stock standard solutions--Stock standard solutions may be 

prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified 

solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in reagent water using 

assayed liquids. Since acrolein and acrylonitrile are lachrymators, 

primary dilutions of these compounds should be prepared in a hood. A 

NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst 

handles high concentrations of such materials.

    6.6.1 Place about 9.8 mL of reagent water into a 10-mL ground glass 

stoppered volumetric flask. For acrolein standards the reagent water 

must be adjusted to pH 4 to 5. Weight the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.

    6.6.2 Using a 100-[micro]L syringe, immediately add two or more 

drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure 

that the drops fall directly into the water without contacting the neck 

of the flask.

    6.6.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the 

flask several times. Calculate the concentration in [micro]g/[micro]L 

from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% 

or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock staldard. Optionally, stock standard 

solutions may be prepared using the pure standard material by 

volumetrically measuring the appropriate amounts and determining the 

weight of the material using the density of the material. Commercially 

prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are 

certified by the manufactaurer or by an independent source.

    6.6.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottle. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light.

    6.6.5 Prepare fresh standards daily.

    6.7 Secondary dilution standards--Using stock standard solutions, 

prepare secondary dilution standards in reagent water that contain the 

compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary 

dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the 

aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will 

bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary dilution 

standards should be prepared daily and stored at 4 [deg]C.

    6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications 

in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 [deg]C by 

backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the 

trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.

    7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The 

gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate 

conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and 

trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard 

technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 

7.4).

    7.3 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 

[micro]L of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 

1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-[micro]L syringe with a 0.006 in. ID 

needle should be used for this operation. One of the external standards 

should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector. These standards must be prepared fresh daily.

    7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and 

tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration of the 

standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for 

each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration 

(calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (< 10% 

relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be 

assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place 

of a calibration curve.

    7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples.

    7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in 

Section 7.3.1.

    7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal 

standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7. It is 

recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a 

concentration of 15 [micro]g/mL of each internal standard compound. The 

addition of 10 [micro]L of this standard to 5.0 mL of sample or 

calibration standard would be equivalent to 30 [micro]g/L.

    7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, 

adding 10 [micro]L of internal standard spiking solution directly to the 

syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against 

concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate 

response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.



[[Page 69]]









                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------







                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard.

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured.



If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF 

can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.

    7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.

    7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.

    7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the 

corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the 

responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated 

ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls 

outside the range, a new calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF 

must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of 

measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the 

analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to 

demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under 

control.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 25 [micro]g/

mL in reagent water. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained 

from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring 

and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not 

available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from another external source. If not available from either 

source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the 

laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used 

for calibration.

    8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 50 [micro]g/L of each 

parameter by adding 200 [micro]L of QC check sample concentrate to 100 

mL of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample 

according to Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 3. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If either s exceeds the precision limit or X falls 

outside the range for accuracy, the system performance is unacceptable 

for that parameter. Locate and correct the source of the



[[Page 70]]



problem and repeat the test for each compound of interest.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 50 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 

[micro]L of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine 

the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.7

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 [micro]L of QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent 

water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that 

failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

3. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column or mass spectrometer 

must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard 

reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation 

studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 All samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of 

collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined 

chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient 

for up to 5 ppm Cl2) to the empty sample bottle just prior to 

shipping to the sampling site. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used 

for measurement of residual chlorine.8 Field test kits are 

available for this purpose.

    9.2 If acrolein is to be analyzed, collect about 500 mL of sample in 

a clean glass container. Adjust the pH of the sample to 4 to 5 using 

acid or base, measuring with narrow



[[Page 71]]



range pH paper. Samples for acrolein analysis receiving no pH adjustment 

must be analyzed within 3 days of sampling.

    9.3 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers having a 

total volume of at least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle just to 

overflowing in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the sample 

as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air bubbles 

are entrapped in it. If preservative has been added, shake vigorously 

for 1 min. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of 

analysis.

    9.4 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of 

collection.3



                              10. Procedure



    10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times 

and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the 

separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 5. Other packed 

columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the 

requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 20 mL-

min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and 

trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the 

purging device sample introduction needle.

    10.4 Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed 

syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully pour 

the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of overflowing. Replace 

the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and 

vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Since 

this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample 

for future analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this 

time to protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 [micro]L of the 

internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), if applicable, 

through the valve bore then close the valve.

    10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve 

on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample 

into the purging chamber.

    10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 15.0  0.1 min while heating at 85  2 

[deg]C.

    10.7 After the 15-min purge time, attach the trap to the 

chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode 

(Figure 4), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. 

Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the 

trap to 180 [deg]C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 

20 and 60 mL/min for 1.5 min.

    10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph, 

empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash 

the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.

    10.9 After desorbing the sample for 1.5 min, recondition the trap by 

returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s then 

close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through 

the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 210 [deg]C. After 

approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve 

to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next 

sample can be analyzed.

    10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.



                            11. Calculations



    11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the 

peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor 

determined in Section 7.3.2.

    11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.097



                                                              Equation 2



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard.



    11.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         12. Method Performance



    12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above



[[Page 72]]



zero.1 The MDL concentrations listed in Table 1 were obtained 

using reagent water.9 The MDL actually achieved in a given 

analysis will vary depending on instrument sensitivity and matrix 

effects.

    12.2 This method is recommended for the concentration range from the 

MDL to 1,000xMDL. Direct aqueous injection techniques should be used to 

measure concentration levels above 1,000xMDL.

    12.3 In a single laboratory (Battelle-Columbus), the average 

recoveries and standard deviations presented in Table 2 were 

obtained.9 Seven replicate samples were analyzed at each 

spike level.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. ``Determining Volatile 

Organics at Microgram-per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,'' Journal 

American Water Works Association, 66, 739 (1974).

    3. ``Evaluate Test Procedures for Acrolein and Acrylonitrile,'' 

Special letter report for EPA Project 4719-A, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, 

Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, 27 June 1979.

    4. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983).

    8. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    9. ``Evaluation of Method 603 (Modified),'' EPA-600/4-84-ABC, 

National Technical Information Service, PB84-, Springfield, Virginia 

22161, Nov. 1984.



     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Retention time (min)     Method

                                     ------------------------  detection

              Parameter                                          limit

                                       Column 1    Column 2   ([micro]g/

                                                                  L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Acrolein............................     10.6         8.2         0.7

Acrylonitrile.......................     12.7         9.8         0.5

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column 1 conditions: Porapak-QS (80/100 mesh) packed in a 10 ft x 2 mm

  ID glass or stainless steel column with helium carrier gas at 30 mL/

  min flow rate. Column temperature held isothermal at 110 [deg]C for

  1.5 min (during desorption), then heated as rapidly as possible to 150

  [deg]C and held for 20 min; column bakeout at 190 [deg]C for 10

  min.\9\

Column 2 conditions: Chromosorb 101 (60/80 mesh) packed in a 6 ft. x 0.1

  in. ID glass or stainless steel column with helium carrier gas at 40

  mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held isothermal at 80 [deg]C for

  4 min, then programmed at 50 [deg]C/min to 120 [deg]C and held for 12

  min.





                          Table 2--Single Laboratory Accuracy and Precision--Method 603

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                      Spike      Average    Standard

                                                          Sample      conc.     recovery    deviation   Average

                       Parameter                          matrix   ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/   percent

                                                                       L)          L)          L)       recovery

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Acrolein...............................................        RW        5.0          5.2         0.2        104

                                                               RW       50.0         51.4         0.7        103

                                                             POTW        5.0          4.0         0.2         80

                                                             POTW       50.0         44.4         0.8         89

                                                               IW        5.0          0.1         0.1          2

                                                               IW      100.0          9.3         1.1          9

Acrylonitrile..........................................        RW        5.0          4.2         0.2         84

                                                               RW       50.0         51.4         1.5        103

                                                             POTW       20.0         20.1         0.8        100

                                                             POTW      100.0        101.3         1.5        101

                                                               IW       10.0          9.1         0.8         91

                                                               IW      100.0        104.0         3.2        104

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

 ARW=Reagent water.

 APOTW=Prechlorination secondary effluent from a municipal sewage treatment plant.

 AIW=Industrial wastewater containing an unidentified acrolein reactant.





                         Table 3--Calibration and QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 603 \a\

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                             Limit for

                                                               Range for Q       S      Range for X   Range for

                          Parameter                             ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/   ([micro]g/   P, Ps (%)

                                                                    L)          L)           L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Acrolein.....................................................    45.9-54.1         4.6    42.9-60.1       88-118



[[Page 73]]





Acrylonitrile................................................    41.2-58.8         9.9    33.1-69.9       71-135

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

a=Criteria were calculated assuming a QC check sample concentration of 50 [micro]g/L.9

Q=Concentration measured in QC check sample, in [micro]g/L (Section 7.5.3).

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.008





[[Page 74]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.009





[[Page 75]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.010





[[Page 76]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.011



                           Method 604--Phenols



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of phenol and certain 

substituted phenols. The following parameters may be determined by this 

method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                    STORET

                    Parameter                         No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

4-Chloro-3-methylphenol..........................     34452      59-50-7

2--Chlorophenol..................................     34586      95-57-8

2,4-Dichlorophenol...............................     34601     120-83-2

2,4-Dimethylphenol...............................     34606     105-67-9

2,4-Dinitrophenol................................     34616      51-28-5

2-Methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol.......................     34657     534-52-1

2-Nitrophenol....................................     34591      88-75-5

4-Nitrophenol....................................     34646     100-02-7

Pentachlorophenol................................     39032      87-86-5

Phenol...........................................     34694     108-95-2

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol............................     34621      88-06-2

------------------------------------------------------------------------





    1.2 This is a flame ionization detector gas chromatographic (FIDGC) 

method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in 

municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When 

this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the 

compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at 

least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes 

analytical conditions for derivatization, cleanup, and electron capture 

detector gas chromatography (ECDGC) that can be used to confirm 

measurements made by FIDGC. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass 

spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and 

quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed 

above, using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1) \1\ 

for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific 

wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature of 

interferences in the sample matrix. The MDL listed in Table 1 for each 

parameter was achieved with a flame ionization detector (FID). The MDLs 

that were achieved when the derivatization cleanup and electron capture 

detector (ECD) were employed are presented in Table 2.



[[Page 77]]



    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the 

interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the 

ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is acidified and 

extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The 

methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to 2-propanol during 

concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by 

gas chromatography and the phenols are then measured with an FID.\2\

    2.2 A preliminary sample wash under basic conditions can be employed 

for samples having high general organic and organic base interferences.

    2.3 The method also provides for a derivatization and column 

chromatography cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of 

interferences.2, 3 The derivatives are analyzed by ECDGC.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.\4\ Clean all glassware 

as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used in 

it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with hot 

water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such as PCBs, may not 

be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and 

pesticide quality hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace 

heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually eliminates PCB 

interference. Volumetric ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. 

After drying and cooling, glassware should be sealed and stored in a 

clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or other 

contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are 

coextracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will 

vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

derivatization cleanup procedure in Section 12 can be used to overcome 

many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional 

cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Tables 1 and 2.

    3.3 The basic sample wash (Section 10.2) may cause significantly 

reduced recovery of phenol and 2,4-dimethylphenol. The analyst must 

recognize that results obtained under these conditions are minimum 

concentrations.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

mothod has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

5-7 for the information of analyst.

    4.2 Special care should be taken in handling pentafluorobenzyl 

bromide, which is a lachrymator, and 18-crown-6-ether, which is highly 

toxic.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be



[[Page 78]]



used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly 

rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water 

to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An 

integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional 

composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are 

included for illustration only.):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnel--2-L, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, 400 mm long x 19 mm ID, 

with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Chromatographic column--100 mm long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon 

stopcock.

    5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Two-ball micro (Kontes K-

569001-0219 or equivalent).

    5.2.8 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.2.9 Reaction flask--15 to 25-mL round bottom flask, with standard 

tapered joint, fitted with a water-cooled condenser and U-shaped drying 

tube containing granular calcium chloride.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2[deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighting 0.0001 g.

    5.6 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with a 

temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column 

injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical 

columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is 

recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.6.1 Column for underivatized phenols--1.8 m long x 2 mm ID glass, 

packed with 1% SP-1240DA on Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. 

This column was used to develop the method performance statements in 

Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are 

provided in Section 11.1.

    5.6.2 Column for derivatized phenols--1.8 m long x 2 mm ID glass, 

packed with 5% OV-17 on Chromosorb W-AW-DMCS (80/100 mesh) or 

equivalent. This column has proven effective in the analysis of 

wastewaters for derivatization products of the parameters listed in the 

scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance 

statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column 

packings are provided in Section 11.1.

    5.6.3 Detectors--Flame ionization and electron capture detectors. 

The FID is used when determining the parent phenols. The ECD is used 

when determining the derivatized phenols. Guidelines for the use of 

alternatve detectors are provided in Section 11.1.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (1 N)--Dissolve 4 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.4 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 

400[deg]C for 4 h in a shallow tray.

    6.5 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.6 Sulfuric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent 

water.

    6.7 Sulfuric acid (1 N)--Slowly, add 58 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to reagent water and 

dilute to 1 L.

    6.8 Potassium carbonate--(ACS) Powdered.

    6.9 Pentafluorobenzyl bromide ([alpha]-Bromopentafluorotoluene)--97% 

minimum purity.

    Note: This chemical is a lachrymator. (See Section 4.2.)

    6.10 18-crown-6-ether (1,4,7,10,13,16-Hexaoxacyclooctadecane)--98% 

minimum purity.

    Note: This chemical is highly toxic.

    6.11 Derivatization reagent--Add 1 mL of pentafluorobenzyl bromide 

and 1 g of 18-crown-6-ether to a 50-mL volumetric flask and dilute to 

volume with 2-propanol. Prepare fresh weekly. This operation should be 

carried out in a hood. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light.

    6.12 Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride, 2-propanol, 

toluene--Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.13 Silica gel--100/200 mesh, Davison, grade-923 or equivalent. 

Activate at 130 [deg]C overnight and store in a desiccator.

    6.14 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.14.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in 2-propanol



[[Page 79]]



and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be 

used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed 

to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to 

calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared 

stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified 

by the manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.14.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.14.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, 

or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.15 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 To calibrate the FIDGC for the anaylsis of underivatized 

phenols, establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent 

to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be 

calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the 

internal standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure for FIDGC:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with 2-propanol. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]l, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 11 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare 

a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of 

response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the 

working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through 

the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor 

can be used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure for FIDGC--To use this 

approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that 

are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The 

analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal 

standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of 

these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is 

applicable to all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with 2-propanol. One of the standards should be at 

a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 11 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. 

Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.





                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------





                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).



Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 To calibrate the ECDGC for the analysis of phenol derivatives, 

establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those 

given in Table 2.

    7.5.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with 2-propanol. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 2) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected



[[Page 80]]



range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the 

working range of the detector.

    7.5.2 Each time samples are to be derivatized, simultaneously treat 

a 1-mL aliquot of each calibration standard as described in Section 12.

    7.5.3 After derivatization, analyze 2 to 5 [micro]L of each column 

eluate collected according to the method beginning in Section 12.8 and 

tabulate peak height or area responses against the calculated equivalent 

mass of underivatized phenol injected. The results can be used to 

prepare a calibration curve for each compound.

    7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.6 and 11.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of 

measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the 

analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 100 

[micro]g/mL in 2-propanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If 

not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from another external source. If not available from either 

source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the 

laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used 

for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 

100 [micro]g/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each 

of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 3. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Talbe 3 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of 

the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 

8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.

    8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the 

test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.



[[Page 81]]



    8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those 

parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will 

confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, 

locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all 

compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 100 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any, 

or, if none, (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or 100 [micro]g/L.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.8 If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than 

100 [micro]g/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria 

in Table 3, or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the 

specific spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance criteria 

for the recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the 

equation in Table 4, substituting the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) 

calculate overall precision (S') using the equation in Table 4, 

substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike 

concentration as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/

T)%.8

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.



    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.



    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

3. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6. It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and



[[Page 82]]



the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess 

the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over 

the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory 

techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific 

element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, 

the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and 

participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices 9 should be followed, except that the 

bottle must not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite 

samples should be collected in refrigerated glass containers in 

accordance with the requirements of the program. Automatic sampling 

equipment must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing and other 

potential sources of contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if 

residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter 

of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for 

measurement of residual chlorine.10 Field test kits are 

available for this purpose.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.2



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of sample bottle for later 

determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel.

    10.2 For samples high in organic content, the analyst may solvent 

wash the sample at basic pH as prescribed in Sections 10.2.1 and 10.2.2 

to remove potential method interferences. Prolonged or exhaustive 

contact with solvent during the wash may result in low recovery of some 

of the phenols, notably phenol and 2,4-dimethylphenol. For relatively 

clean samples, the wash should be omitted and the extraction, beginning 

with Section 10.3, should be followed.

    10.2.1 Adjust the pH of the sample to 12.0 or greater with sodium 

hydroxide solution.

    10.2.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample by shaking the 

funnel for 1 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. 

Discard the solvent layer. The wash can be repeated up to two additional 

times if significant color is being removed.

    10.3 Adjust the sample to a pH of 1 to 2 with sulfuric acid.

    10.4 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 

min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through 

glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the 

methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

    10.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.

    10.6 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-

mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration 

devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.7 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying 

column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect 

the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and 

column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the 

quantitative transfer.

    10.8 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.9 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to 95 to 100 

[deg]C. Remove the Synder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint 

into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of 2-propanol. A 5-mL syringe 

is recommended for this operation. Attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column 

to the concentrator tube and prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of 

2-propanol to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath 

so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. 

Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature 

as required to complete



[[Page 83]]



concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the 

balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not 

flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 2.5 mL, remove the K-D 

apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Add an 

additional 2 mL of 2-propanol through the top of the micro-Snyder column 

and resume concentrating as before. When the apparent volume of liquid 

reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool 

for at least 10 min.

    10.10 Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into 

the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of 2-propanol. Adjust the 

extract volume to 1.0 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store 

refrigerated at 4 [deg]C if further processing will not be performed 

immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it 

should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample 

extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with FIDGC analysis 

(Section 11). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 

12.

    10.11 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



            11. Flame Ionization Detector Gas Chromatography



    11.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL 

that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the 

separations achieved by this column is shown in Figure 1. Other packed 

or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or 

detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    11.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    11.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, the 

internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    11.4 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.11 

Smaller (1.0 [micro]L) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are 

employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and 

the resulting peak size in area or peak height units.

    11.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

may be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    11.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    11.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, an alternative gas chromatographic procedure 

is required. Section 12 describes a derivatization and column 

chromatographic procedure which has been tested and found to be a 

practical means of analyzing phenols in complex extracts.



   12. Derivatization and Electron Capture Detector Gas Chromatography



    12.1 Pipet a 1.0-mL aliquot of the 2-propanol solution of standard 

or sample extract into a glass reaction vial. Add 1.0 mL of derivatizing 

reagent (Section 6.11). This amount of reagent is sufficient to 

derivatize a solution whose total phenolic content does not exceed 0.3 

mg/mL.

    12.2 Add about 3 mg of potassium carbonate to the solution and shake 

gently.

    12.3 Cap the mixture and heat it for 4 h at 80 [deg]C in a hot water 

bath.

    12.4 Remove the solution from the hot water bath and allow it to 

cool.

    12.5 Add 10 mL of hexane to the reaction flask and shake vigorously 

for 1 min. Add 3.0 mL of distilled, deionized water to the reaction 

flask and shake for 2 min. Decant a portion of the organic layer into a 

concentrator tube and cap with a glass stopper.

    12.6 Place 4.0 g of silica gel into a chromatographic column. Tap 

the column to settle the silica gel and add about 2 g of anhydrous 

sodium sulfate to the top.

    12.7 Preelute the column with 6 mL of hexane. Discard the eluate and 

just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, pipet 

onto the column 2.0 mL of the hexane solution (Section 12.5) that 

contains the derivatized sample or standard. Elute the column with 10.0 

mL of hexane and discard the eluate. Elute the column, in order, with: 

10.0 mL of 15% toluene in hexane (Fraction 1); 10.0 mL of 40% toluene in 

hexane (Fraction 2); 10.0 mL of 75% toluene in hexane (Fraction 3); and 

10.0 mL of 15% 2-propanol in toluene (Fraction 4). All elution mixtures 

are prepared on a volume: volume basis. Elution patterns for the 

phenolic derivatives are shown in Table 2. Fractions may be combined as 

desired, depending upon the specific phenols of interest or level of 

interferences.

    12.8 Analyze the fractions by ECDGC. Table 2 summarizes the 

recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in 

this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these 

conditions. An example of the separations



[[Page 84]]



achieved by this column is shown in Figure 2.

    12.9 Calibrate the system daily with a minimum of three aliquots of 

calibration standards, containing each of the phenols of interest that 

are derivatized according to Section 7.5.

    12.10 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the column fractions into the gas 

chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique. Smaller (1.0 [micro]L) 

volumes can be injected if automatic devices are employed. Record the 

volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and the resulting peak 

size in area or peak height units. If the peak response exceeds the 

linear range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample analyzed by FIDGC (without derivatization) as indicated below.

    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.098



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.099



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample analyzed by derivatization and ECDGC according to Equation 4.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.100



                                                              Equation 4



where:

A=Mass of underivatized phenol represented by area of peak in sample 

chromatogram, determined from calibration curve in Section 7.5.3 (ng).

Vi=Volume of eluate injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Total volume of column eluate or combined fractions from 

which Vi was taken ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted in Section 10.10 (mL).

B=Total volume of hexane added in Section 12.5 (mL).

C=Volume of hexane sample solution added to cleanup column in Section 

12.7 (mL).

D=Total volume of 2-propanol extract prior to derivatization (mL).

E=Volume of 2-propanol extract carried through derivatization in Section 

12.1 (mL).



    13.3 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.1 The MDL 

concentrations listed in Tables 1 and 2 were obtained using reagent 

water.12 Similar results were achieved using representative 

wastewaters. The MDL actually achieved in a given analysis will vary 

depending on instrument sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

as six concentrations over the range 12 to 450 [micro]g/L.\13\ Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships for a flame ionization detector are 

presented in Table 4.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Phenols in Industrial and Municipal 

Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-84-ABC, National Technical Information Service, 

PBXYZ, Springfield, Virginia 22161, November 1984.

    3. Kawahara, F. K. ``Microdetermination of Derivatives of Phenols 

and Mercaptans by



[[Page 85]]



Means of Electron Capture Gas Chromatography,'' Analytical Chemistry, 

40, 1009 (1968).

    4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    5. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    6. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    7. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    8. Provost, L. P., and Elder, R. S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    10. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methmds for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    11. Burke, J. A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue 

Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of 

Official Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    12. ``Development of Detection Limits, EPA Method 604, Phenols,'' 

Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2625, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, 

Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.

    13. ``EPA Method Study 14 Method 604-Phenols,'' EPA 600/4-84-044, 

National Technical Information Service, PB84-196211, Springfield, 

Virginia 22161, May 1984.



     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                               Method

                                                 Retention    detection

                   Parameter                    time (min)      limit

                                                            ([micro]g/L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

2-Chlorophenol................................        1.70          0.31

2-Nitrophenol.................................        2.00          0.45

Phenol........................................        3.01          0.14

2,4-Dimethylphenol............................        4.03          0.32

2,4-Dichlorophenol............................        4.30          0.39

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol.........................        6.05          0.64

4-Chloro-3-methylphenol.......................        7.50          0.36

2,4-Dinitrophenol.............................       10.00         13.0

2-Methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol....................       10.24         16.0

Pentachlorophenol.............................       12.42          7.4

4-Nitrophenol.................................       24.25          2.8

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column conditions: Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) coated with 1% SP-1240DA

  packed in a 1.8 m long x 2 mm ID glass column with nitrogen carrier

  gas at 30 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature was 80 [deg]C at

  injection, programmed immediately at 8 [deg]C/min to 150 [deg]C final

  temperature. MDL were determined with an FID.





          Table 2--Silica Gel Fractionation and Electron Capture Gas Chromatography of PFBB Derivatives

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Percent recovery by                  Method

                                                                       fraction a          Retention   detection

                       Parent compound                        ----------------------------    time       limit

                                                                                             (min)    ([micro]g/

                                                                 1      2      3      4                   L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2-Chlorophenol...............................................  .....     90      1  .....        3.3        0.58

2-Nitrophenol................................................  .....  .....      9     90        9.1        0.77

Phenol.......................................................  .....     90     10  .....        1.8        2.2

2,4-Dimethylphenol...........................................  .....     95      7  .....        2.9        0.63

2,4-Dichlorophenol...........................................  .....     95      1  .....        5.8        0.68

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol........................................     50     50  .....  .....        7.0        0.58

4-Chloro-3-methylphenol......................................  .....     84     14  .....        4.8        1.8

Pentachlorophenol............................................     75     20  .....  .....       28.8        0.59

4-Nitrophenol................................................  .....  .....      1     90       14.0        0.70

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column conditions: Chromosorb W-AW-DMCS (80/100 mesh) coated with 5% OV-17 packed in a 1.8 m long x 2.0 mm ID

  glass column with 5% methane/95% argon carrier gas at 30 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held isothermal

  at 200 [deg]C. MDL were determined with an ECD.



a Eluant composition:

 Fraction 1--15% toluene in hexane.

 Fraction 2--40% toluene in hexane.

 Fraction 3--75% toluene in hexane.

 Fraction 4--15% 2-propanol in toluene.





[[Page 86]]





                                   Table 3--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 604

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                             Limit for  Range for X

                                                                Test conc.       s       ([micro]g/   Range for

                           Parameter                            ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/       L)         P, Ps

                                                                    L)          L)                    (percent)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4-Chloro-3-methylphenol.......................................       100          16.6   56.7-113.4       49-122

2-Chlorophenol................................................       100          27.0   54.1-110.2       38-126

2,4-Dichlorophenol............................................       100          25.1   59.7-103.3       44-119

2,4-Dimethylphenol............................................       100          33.3   50.4-100.0       24-118

4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol....................................       100          25.0   42.4-123.6       30-136

2,4-Dinitrophenol.............................................       100          36.0   31.7-125.1       12-145

2-Nitrophenol.................................................       100          22.5   56.6-103.8       43-117

4-Nitrophenol.................................................       100          19.0   22.7-100.0       13-110

Pentachlorophenol.............................................       100          32.4   56.7-113.5       36-134

Phenol........................................................       100          14.1   32.4-100.0       23-108

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol.........................................       100          16.6   60.8-110.4       53-119

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s--Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X--Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps--Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 4. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 4.





                Table 4--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 604

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                            Accuracy, as      Single Analyst        Overall

                       Parameter                            recovery, X'      precision, sr'     precision, S'

                                                            ([micro]g/L)       ([micro]g/L)       ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4-Chloro-3-methylphenol................................         0.87C-1.97         0.11X-0.21         0.16X+1.41

2-Chlorophenol.........................................         0.83C-0.84         0.18X+0.20         0.21X+0.75

2,4-Dichlorophenol.....................................         0.81C+0.48         0.17X-0.02         0.18X+0.62

2,4-Dimethylphenol.....................................         0.62C-1.64         0.30X-0.89         0.25X+0.48

4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol.............................         0.84C-1.01         0.15X+1.25         0.19X+5.85

2,4-Dinitrophenol......................................         0.80C-1.58         0.27X-1.15         0.29X+4.51

2-Nitrophenol..........................................         0.81C-0.76         0.15X+0.44         0.14X+3.84

4-Nitrophenol..........................................         0.46C+0.18         0.17X+2.43         0.19X+4.79

Pentachlorophenol......................................         0.83C+2.07         0.22X-0.58         0.23X+0.57

Phenol.................................................         0.43C+0.11         0.20X-0.88         0.17X+0.77

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol..................................         0.86C-0.40         0.10X+0.53         0.13X+2.40

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 87]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.012





[[Page 88]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.013



                         Method 605--Benzidines



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain benzidines. The 

following parameters can be determined by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                   Parameter                     Storet No     CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzidine.....................................        39120      92-87-5

3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine........................        34631      91-94-1

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) method 

applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in 

municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When 

this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for the compounds 

above, identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. This method describes electrochemical conditions 

at a second potential which can be used to confirm measurements made 

with this method. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass 

spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and 

quantitative confirmation of results for the parameters listed above, 

using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1) 

1 for each parameter is



[[Page 89]]



listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific wastewater may differ from 

those listed, depending upon the nature of the interferences in the 

sample matrix.

    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of HPLC instrumentation and in the 

interpretation of liquid chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate 

the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with chloroform using liquid-liquid extractions in a separatory funnel. 

The chloroform extract is extracted with acid. The acid extract is then 

neutralized and extracted with chloroform. The final chloroform extract 

is exchanged to methanol while being concentrated using a rotary 

evaporator. The extract is mixed with buffer and separated by HPLC. The 

benzidine compounds are measured with an electrochemical 

detector.2

    2.2 The acid back-extraction acts as a general purpose cleanup to 

aid in the elimination of interferences.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in chromatograms. All of 

these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.3 Clean all 

glassware as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent 

used in it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with 

hot water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials may not be eliminated 

by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and pesticide quality 

hexane may be substi tuted for the muffle furnace heating. Vol umetric 

ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. After drying and cooling, 

glass ware should be sealed and stored in a clean en vironment to 

prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted 

or capped with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedures that are inherent in the extraction step are used to 

overcome many of these interfer ences, but unique samples may require 

addi tional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.

    3.3 Some dye plant effluents contain large amounts of components 

with re tention times closed to benzidine. In these cases, it has been 

found useful to reduce the electrode potential in order to eliminate 

interferences and still detect benzidine. (See Section 12.7.)



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health harzard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

4-6 for the information of the analyst.

    4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been 

tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian 

carcinogens: benzidine and 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine. Primary standards of 

these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA 

approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles 

high concentrations of these toxic compounds.

    4.3 Exposure to chloroform should be minimized by performing all 

extractions and extract concentrations in a hood or other well-

ventiliated area.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene



[[Page 90]]



chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4[deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnels--2000, 1000, and 250-mL, with Teflon 

stopcock.

    5.2.2 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.2.3 Rotary evaporator.

    5.2.4 Flasks--Round bottom, 100-mL, with 24/40 joints.

    5.2.5 Centrifuge tubes--Conical, graduated, with Teflon-lined screw 

caps.

    5.2.6 Pipettes--Pasteur, with bulbs.

    5.3 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.4 High performance liquid chromatograph (HPLC)--An analytical 

system complete with column supplies, high pressure syringes, detector, 

and compatible recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak 

areas and retention times.

    5.4.1 Solvent delivery system--With pulse damper, Altex 110A or 

equivalent.

    5.4.2 Injection valve (optional)--Waters U6K or equivalent.

    5.4.3 Electrochemical detector--Bioanalyti cal Systems LC-2A with 

glassy carbon electrode, or equivalent. This detector has proven 

effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in 

the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance 

statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors 

are provided in Section 12.1.

    5.4.4 Electrode polishing kit--Princeton Applied Research Model 9320 

or equivalent.

    5.4.5 Column--Lichrosorb RP-2, 5 micron particle diameter, in a 25 

cm x 4.6 mm ID stainless steel column. This column was used to develop 

the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use 

of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (5 N)--Dissolve 20 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (1 M)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 1 L.

    6.4 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.5 Sodium tribasic phosphate (0.4 M)--Dissolve 160 g of trisodium 

phosphate decahydrate (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 1 L.

    6.6 Sulfuric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent 

water.

    6.7 Sulfuric acid (1 M)--Slowly, add 58 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to reagent water and 

dilute to 1 L.

    6.8 Acetate buffer (0.1 M, pH 4.7)--Dissolve 5.8 mL of glacial 

acetic acid (ACS) and 13.6 g of sodium acetate trihydrate (ACS) in 

reagent water which has been purified by filtration through a RO-4 

Millipore System or equivalent and dilute to 1 L.

    6.9 Acetonitrile, chloroform (preserved with 1% ethanol), methanol--

Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.10 Mobile phase--Place equal volumes of filtered acetonitrile 

(Millipore type FH filter or equivalent) and filtered acetate buffer 

(Millipore type GS filter or equivalent) in a narrow-mouth, glass 

container and mix thoroughly. Prepare fresh weekly. Degas daily by 

sonicating under vacuum, by heating an stirring, or by purging with 

helium.

    6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in methanol and dilute 

to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the 

convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or 

greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, 

or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



[[Page 91]]



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to 

those given in Table 1. The HPLC system can be calibrated using the 

external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard 

technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with mobile phase. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector.

    7.2.2 Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 [micro]L or a constant 

volume injection loop, analyze each calibration standard according to 

Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass 

injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for 

each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount 

injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% 

relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be 

assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place 

of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with mobile phase. One of the standards should be 

at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.3.2 Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 [micro]L or a constant 

volume injection loop, analyze each calibration standard according to 

Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against 

concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate 

response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.





                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------





                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound. If serious loss of 

response occurs, polish the electrode and recalibrate.

    7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.9, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the 

cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to



[[Page 92]]



the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 

8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing benzidine and/or 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine at a concentration of 

50 [micro]g/mL each in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If 

not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from another external source. If not available from either 

source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the 

laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used 

for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 

50 [micro]g/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each 

of four 1-L-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 2. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter. Locate and correct the 

source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest 

beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 50 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or 50 [micro]g/L.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\7\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than 50 

[micro]g/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria in 

Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the specific 

spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance criteria for the 

recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation 

in Table 3, substituting



[[Page 93]]



the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S') 

using the equation in Table 3, substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the 

range for recovery at the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/T)%.\7\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Sections 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. 

The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as HPLC with a dissimilar column, gas chromatography, or mass 

spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should 

analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant 

performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices\8\ should be followed, except that the bottle must 

not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite samples should 

be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the 

requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as 

free as possible of Tygon tubing and other potential sources of 

contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4[deg]C and stored 

in the dark from the time of collection until extraction. Both benzidine 

and 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine are easily oxidized. Fill the sample bottles 

and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate 

per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be 

used for measurement of residual chlorine.\9\ Field test kits are 

available for this purpose. After mixing, adjust the pH of the sample to 

a range of 2 to 7 with sulfuric acid.

    9.3 If 1,2-diphenylhydrazine is likely to be present, adjust the pH 

of the sample to 4.0 0.2 to prevent rearrangement 

to benzidine.

    9.4 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection. 

Extracts may be held up to 7 days before analysis, if stored under an 

inert (oxidant free) atmosphere.\2\ The extract should be protected from 

light.



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper 

and adjust to within the range of 6.5 to 7.5 with sodium hydroxide 

solution or sulfuric acid.

    10.2 Add 100 mL of chloroform to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 

30 s to rinse the inner surface. (Caution: Handle chloroform in a well 

ventilated area.) Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and 

extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting 

to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the 

water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between 

layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the 

analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase 

separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may 

include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass



[[Page 94]]



wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the chloroform 

extract in a 250-mL separatory funnel.

    10.3 Add a 50-mL volume of chloroform to the sample bottle and 

repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in 

the separatory funnel. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.

    10.4 Separate and discard any aqueous layer remaining in the 250-mL 

separatory funnel after combining the organic extracts. Add 25 mL of 1 M 

sulfuric acid and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. 

Transfer the aqueous layer to a 250-mL beaker. Extract with two 

additional 25-mL portions of 1 M sulfuric acid and combine the acid 

extracts in the beaker.

    10.5 Place a stirbar in the 250-mL beaker and stir the acid extract 

while carefully adding 5 mL of 0.4 M sodium tribasic phosphate. While 

monitoring with a pH meter, neutralize the extract to a pH between 6 and 

7 by dropwise addition of 5 N sodium hydroxide solution while stirring 

the solution vigorously. Approximately 25 to 30 mL of 5 N sodium 

hydroxide solution will be required and it should be added over at least 

a 2-min period. Do not allow the sample pH to exceed 8.

    10.6 Transfer the neutralized extract into a 250-mL separatory 

funnel. Add 30 mL of chloroform and shake the funnel for 2 min. Allow 

the phases to separate, and transfer the organic layer to a second 250-

mL separatory funnel.

    10.7 Extract the aqueous layer with two additional 20-mL aliquots of 

chloroform as before. Combine the extracts in the 250-mL separatory 

funnel.

    10.8 Add 20 mL of reagent water to the combined organic layers and 

shake for 30 s.

    10.9 Transfer the organic extract into a 100-mL round bottom flask. 

Add 20 mL of methanol and concentrate to 5 mL with a rotary evaporator 

at reduced pressure and 35 [deg]C. An aspirator is recommended for use 

as the source of vacuum. Chill the receiver with ice. This operation 

requires approximately 10 min. Other concentration techniques may be 

used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.10 Using a 9-in. Pasteur pipette, transfer the extract to a 15-

mL, conical, screw-cap centrifuge tube. Rinse the flask, including the 

entire side wall, with 2-mL portions of methanol and combine with the 

original extract.

    10.11 Carefully concentrate the extract to 0.5 mL using a gentle 

stream of nitrogen while heating in a 30 [deg]C water bath. Dilute to 2 

mL with methanol, reconcentrate to 1 mL, and dilute to 5 mL with acetate 

buffer. Mix the extract thoroughly. Cap the centrifuge tube and store 

refrigerated and protected from light if further processing will not be 

performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two 

days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the 

sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with HPLC analysis 

(Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 

11.

    10.12 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1,000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of 

Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the 

cleanup procedure.



               12. High Performance Liquid Chromatography



    12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

HPLC. Included in this table are retention times, capacity factors, and 

MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the 

separations achieved by this HPLC column is shown in Figure 1. Other 

HPLC columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met. When the HPLC is idle, it is 

advisable to maintain a 0.1 mL/min flow through the column to prolong 

column life.

    12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the instrument.

    12.4 Inject 5 to 25 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the HPLC. If constant volume injection loops are not used, record the 

volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and the resulting peak 

size in area or peak height units.

    12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract with mobile phase and reanalyze.

    12.7 If the measurement of the peak response for benzidine is 

prevented by the presence of interferences, reduce the electrode



[[Page 95]]



potential to +0.6 V and reanalyze. If the benzidine peak is still 

obscured by interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.101



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.102



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\1\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\10\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually 

achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 7xMDL to 3000xMDL.\10\

    14.3 This method was tested by 17 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 70 [micro]g/L.\11\ Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Benzidines in Industrial and Muncipal 

Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-82-022, National Technical Information Service, 

PB82-196320, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.

    3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    4. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    9. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    10. ``EPA Method Study 15, Method 605 (Benzidines),'' EPA 600/4-84-

062, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211176, Springfield, 

Virginia 22161, June 1984.

    11. ``EPA Method Validation Study 15, Method 605 (Benzidines),'' 

Report for EPA Contract 68-03-2624 (In preparation).



[[Page 96]]







     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                Method

                                                   Column     detection

            Parameter               Retention     capacity      limit

                                    time (min)  factor (k')   ([micro]g/

                                                                  L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzidine........................          6.1         1.44         0.08

3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine...........         12.1         3.84         0.13

------------------------------------------------------------------------

HPLC Column conditions: Lichrosorb RP-2, 5 micron particle size, in a 25

  cmx4.6 mm ID stainless steel column. Mobile Phase: 0.8 mL/min of 50%

  acetonitrile/50% 0.1M pH 4.7 acetate buffer. The MDL were determined

  using an electrochemical detector operated at +0.8 V.





                                   Table 2--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 605

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                                Limit for   Range for

                                                                   Test conc.       s           X      Range for

                            Parameter                              ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/    P, Ps

                                                                       L)          L)          L)      (percent)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzidine........................................................          50        18.7    9.1-61.0      D-140

3.3'-Dichlorobenzidine...........................................          50        23.6   18.7-50.0      5-128

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 605

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Accuracy, as   Single analyst      Overall

                            Parameter                                recovery,    precision, sr'   precision, S'

                                                                  X'([micro]g/L)   ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Benzidine.......................................................      0.70C+0.06      0.28X+0.19      0.40X+0.18

3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine..........................................      0.66C+0.23      0.39X-0.05      0.38X+0.02

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 97]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.014





[[Page 98]]



                       Method 606--Phthalate Ester



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain phthalate 

esters. The following parameters can be determined by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                      STORET

                     Parameter                         No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate........................    39100    117-81-7

Butyl benzyl phthalate.............................    34292     85-68-7

Di-n-butyl phthalate...............................    39110     84-74-2

Diethyl phthalate..................................    34336     84-66-2

Dimethyl phthalate.................................    34341    131-11-3

Di-n-octyl phthalate...............................    34596    117-84-0

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the 

determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial 

discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to 

analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, 

compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a 

second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm 

measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas 

chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the 

qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the 

parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)\1\ for 

each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific wastewater 

may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature of interferences 

in the sample matrix.

    1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are 

essentially the same as in Methods 608, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a 

single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the 

scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the 

concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, 

as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is 

allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic 

conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations 

of these parameters.

    1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the 

interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the 

ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene 

chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration 

to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas 

chromatography and the phthalate esters are then measured with an 

electron capture detector.\2\

    2.2 Analysis for phthalates is especially complicated by their 

ubiquitous occurrence in the environment. The method provides Florisil 

and alumina column cleanup procedures to aid in the elimination of 

interferences that may be encountered.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.\3\ Clean all glassware 

as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used in 

it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with hot 

water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such as PCBs, may not 

be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and 

pesticide quality hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace 

heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually eliminates PCB 

interference. Volumetric ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. 

After drying and cooling, glassware should be sealed and stored in a 

clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or other 

contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Phthalate esters are contaminants in many products commonly 

found in the laboratory. It is particularly important to avoid the use 

of plastics because phthalates are commonly used as plasticizers and are 

easily extracted from plastic materials. Serious phthalate contamination 

can result at any time, if consistent quality control is not practiced. 

Great care must be experienced to prevent such contamination. Exhaustive 

cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to eliminate 

background phthalate contamination.4, 5



[[Page 99]]



    3.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these 

interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup 

approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

6-8 for the information of the analyst.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are 

included for illustration only).

    5.2.1 Separatory funnel--2-L, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm 

long x 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Chromatographic column--300 mm long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon 

stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-420540-0213 or 

equivalent).

    5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Two-ball micro (Kontes K-

569001-0219 or equivalent).

    5.2.8 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2 [deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.6 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with gas 

chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required 

accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and 

strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak 

areas.

    5.6.1 Column 1--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.5% SP-

2250/1.95% SP-2401 Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column 

was used to develop the method performance statemelts in Section 14. 

Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in 

Section 12.1.

    5.6.2 Column 2--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-1 on 

Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.6.3 Detector--Electron capture detector. This detector has proven 

effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in 

the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance 

statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors 

are provided in Section 12.1.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methylene chloride, methanol--

Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.3 Ethyl ether--nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.

    6.3.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is 

used as indicated by



[[Page 100]]



EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from Scientific Products 

Co., Cat. No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)

    6.3.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided 

with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative 

must be added to each liter of ether.

    6.4 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Several levels of 

purification may be required in order to reduce background phthalate 

levels to an acceptable level: 1) Heat 4 h at 400 [deg]C in a shallow 

tray, 2) Heat 16 h at 450 to 500 [deg]C in a shallow tray, 3) Soxhlet 

extract with methylene chloride for 48 h.

    6.5 Florisil--PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 

[deg]F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass 

stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. To prepare for use, place 100 g of 

Florisil into a 500-mL beaker and heat for approximately 16 h at 40 

[deg]C. After heating transfer to a 500-mL reagent bottle. Tightly seal 

and cool to room temperature. When cool add 3 mL of reagent water. Mix 

thoroughly by shaking or rolling for 10 min and let it stand for at 

least 2 h. Keep the bottle sealed tightly.

    6.6 Alumina--Neutral activity Super I, W200 series (ICN Life 

Sciences Group, No. 404583). To prepare for use, place 100 g of alumina 

into a 500-mL beaker and heat for approximately 16 h at 400 [deg]C. 

After heating transfer to a 500-mL reagent bottle. Tightly seal and cool 

to room temperature. When cool add 3 mL of reagent water. Mix thoroughly 

by shaking or rolling for 10 min and let it stand for at least 2 h. Keep 

the bottle sealed tightly.

    6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in isooctane and dilute 

to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the 

convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or 

greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or 

sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish gas chromatograph operating conditions equivalent to 

those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated 

using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal 

standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepared calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with isooctane. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare 

a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of 

response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the 

working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through 

the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor 

can be used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flash. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with isooctane. One of the standards should be at a 

concentraton near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.



[[Page 101]]



    7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. 

Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.





                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------





                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the 

cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the 

method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality contrml (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at the following concentrations in 

acetone: butyl benzyl phthalate, 10 [micro]g/mL; bis(2-ethylhexyl) 

phthalate, 50 [micro]g/mL; di-n-octyl phthalate, 50 [micro]g/mL; any 

other phthlate, 25 [micro]g/mL. The QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agancy, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If 

not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from another external source. If not available from either 

source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the 

laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used 

for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test 

concentrations shown in Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample 

concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.



[[Page 102]]



    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 2. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter. Locate and correct the 

source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest 

beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 

times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 

8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\9\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than the test 

concentration in Section 8.2.2, the analyst must use either the QC 

acceptance criteria in Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria 

calculated for the specific spike concentration. To calculate optional 

acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate 

accuracy (X') using the equation in Table 3, substituting the spike 

concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S') using the 

equation in Table 3, substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for 

recovery at the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/T)%.\9\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%.



[[Page 103]]



Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter on a regular basis 

(e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices\10\ should be followed, except that the bottle must 

not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite samples should 

be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the 

requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as 

free as possible of Tygon tubing and other potential sources of 

contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.\2\



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel.

    10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 

min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phrase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through 

glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the 

methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

    10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.

    10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-

mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentrator 

devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying 

column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect 

the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and 

column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the 

quantitative transfer.

    10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.7 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to about 80 

[deg]C. Momentarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a 

new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Concentrate the 

extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The 

elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.

    10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL 

syringe is recommended for this operation. Adjust the extract volume to 

10 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further 

processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be 

stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, 

proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample 

requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.

    10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11. Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst may use



[[Page 104]]



either procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the 

analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can 

be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.

    11.2 If the entire extract is to be cleaned up by one of the 

following procedures, it must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the 

concentrator tube in Section 10.8, add a clean boiling chip and attach a 

two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL 

of hexane to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath 

(80 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the 

hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water 

temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At 

the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively 

chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of 

liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to 

drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and 

rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane. 

Adjust the final volume to 2.0 mL and proceed with one of the following 

cleanup procedures.

    11.3 Florisil column cleanup for phthalate esters:

    11.3.1 Place 10 g of Florisil into a chromatographic column. Tap the 

column to settle the Florisil and add 1 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate 

to the top.

    11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of hexane. The rate for all 

elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to 

exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer 

the 2-mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of 

hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium 

sulfate layer to the air, add 40 mL of hexane and continue the elution 

of the column. Discard this hexane eluate.

    11.3.3 Next, elute the column with 100 mL of 20% ethyl ether in 

hexane (V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator 

tube. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Section 10.6. No solvent 

exchange is necessary. Adjust the volume of the cleaned up extract to 10 

mL in the concentrator tube and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 

12).

    11.4 Alumina column cleanup for phthalate esters:

    11.4.1 Place 10 g of alumina into a chromatographic column. Tap the 

column to settle the alumina and add 1 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to 

the top.

    11.4.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of hexane. The rate for all 

elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to 

exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer 

the 2-mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of 

hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium 

sulfate layer to the air, add 35 mL of hexane and continue the elution 

of the column. Discard this hexane eluate.

    11.4.3 Next, elute the column with 140 mL of 20% ethyl ether in 

hexane (V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator 

type. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Section 10.6. No solvent 

exchange is necessary. Adjust the volume of the cleaned up extract to 10 

mL in the concentrator tube and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 

12).



                         12. Gas Chromatography



    12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL 

that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations 

achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or 

capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or 

detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal staldard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    12.4 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas-chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.\11\ Smaller 

(1.0 [micro]L) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are 

employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and 

the resulting peak size in area or peak height units.

    12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.



[[Page 105]]



    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.103



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.104



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\1\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\12\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually 

achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 5 x MDL to 1000 x MDL with the following 

exceptions: dimethyl and diethyl phthalate recoveries at 1000 x MDL were 

low (70%); bis-2-ethylhexyl and di-n-octyl phthalate recoveries at 5 x 

MDL were low (60%).\12\

    14.3 This method was tested by 16 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 0.7 to 106 [micro]g/L.\13\ Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Phthalates in Industrial and Muncipal 

Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-81-063, National Technical Information Service, 

PB81-232167, Springfield, Virginia 22161, July 1981.

    3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S., and Nef, G.S. ``Sensitive Method for 

Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota 

Samples,'' Analytical Chemistry, 47, 2225 (1975).

    5. Giam, C.S., and Chan, H.S. ``Control of Blanks in the Analysis of 

Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples,'' U.S. National Bureau of 

Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.

    6. ``Carcinogens--Working with Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    7. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    8. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    9. Provost L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    10. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    11. Burke, J.A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; 

Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of Official 

Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    12. ``Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies, EPA 

Methods 606, 607, and 608,'' Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-

03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring 

and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.



[[Page 106]]



    13. ``EPA Method Study 16 Method 606 (Phthalate Esters),'' EPA 600/

4-84-056, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211275, 

Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.



     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Retention time (min)        Method

                               ----------------------------   detection

           Parameter                                            limit

                                  Column 1      Column 2    ([micro]g/L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Dimethyl phthalate............          2.03          0.95          0.29

Diethyl phthalate.............          2.82          1.27          0.49

Di-n-butyl phthalate..........          8.65          3.50          0.36

Butyl benzyl phthalate........        a 6.94        a 5.11          0.34

Bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate...        a 8.92       a 10.5           2.0

Di-n-octyl phthalate..........       a 16.2        a 18.0           3.0

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column 1 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 1.5% SP-2250/

  1.95% SP-2401 packed in a 1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass column with 5%

  methane/95% argon carrier gas at 60 mL/min flow rate. Column

  temperature held isothermal at 180[deg]C, except where otherwise

  indicated.

Column 2 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 3% OV-1

  packed in a 1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass column with 5% methane/95%

  argon carrier gas at 60 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held

  isothermal at 200 [deg]C, except where otherwise indicated.

a 220 [deg]C column temperature.





                                   Table 2--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 606

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                                Limit for   Range for

                                                                   Test conc.       s           X      Range for

                            Parameter                              ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/    P, Ps

                                                                       L)          L)          L)      (percent)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate......................................          50        38.4    1.2-55.9      D-158

Butyl benzyl phthalate...........................................          10         4.2    5.7-11.0     30-136

Di-n-butyl phthalate.............................................          25         8.9   10.3-29.6     23-136

Diethyl phthalate................................................          25         9.0    1.9-33.4      D-149

Dimethyl phathalate..............................................          25         9.5    1.3-35.5      D-156

Di-n-octyl phthalate.............................................          50        13.4      D-50.0      D-114

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 606

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Accuracy, as   Single analyst      Overall

                            Parameter                              recovery, X'   precision, sr'   precision, S'

                                                                   ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.....................................      0.53C+2.02      0.80X-2.54      0.73X-0.17

Butyl benzyl phthalate..........................................      0.82C+0.13      0.26X+0.04      0.25X+0.07

Di-n-butyl phthalate............................................      0.79C+0.17      0.23X+0.20      0.29X+0.06

Diethyl phthalate...............................................      0.70C+0.13      0.27X+0.05      0.45X+0.11

Dimethyl phthalate..............................................      0.73C+0.17      0.26X+0.14      0.44X+0.31

Di-n-octyl phthalate............................................      0.35C-0.71      0.38X+0.71      0.62X+0.34

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 107]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.015





[[Page 108]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.016





[[Page 109]]



                        Method 607--Nitrosamines



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain nitrosamines. 

The following parameters can be determined by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                   Parameter                     Storet No.    CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

N-Nitrosodimethylamine........................        34438      62-75-9

N-Nitrosodiphenylamine........................        34433      86-30-6

N-Nitrosodi-n-propylamine.....................        34428     621-64-7

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the 

determination of the parameters listed above in municipal and industrial 

discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to 

analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compmunds above, 

compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditimns for a 

second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm 

measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas 

chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the 

qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for N-nitrosodi-n-

propylamine. In order to confirm the presence of N-nitrosodiphenylamine, 

the cleanup procedure specified in Section 11.3 or 11.4 must be used. In 

order to confirm the presence of N-nitrosodimethylamine by GC/MS, Column 

1 of this method must be substituted for the column recommended in 

Method 625. Confirmation of these parameters using GC-high resolution 

mass spectrometry or a Thermal Energy Analyzer is also recommended. 

1, 2

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 

14.1)3 for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a 

specific wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the 

nature of interferences in the sample matrix.

    1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the 

interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the 

ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene 

chloride extract is washed with dilute hydrochloric acid to remove free 

amines, dried, and concentrated to a volume of 10 mL or less. After the 

extract has been exchanged to methanol, it is separated by gas 

chromatography and the parameters are then measured with a nitrogen-

phosphorus detector.4

    2.2 The method provides Florisil and alumina column cleanup 

procedures to separate diphenylamine from the nitrosamines and to aid in 

the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.5 Clean all 

glassware as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent 

used in it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with 

hot water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Solvent rinses with acetone and pesticide quality 

hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace heating. Volumetric 

ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. After drying and cooling, 

glassware should be sealed and stored in a clean environment to prevent 

any accumulation of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted or capped 

with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these 

interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup 

approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.

    3.3 N-Nitrosodiphenylamine is reported6-9 to undergo 

transnitrosation reactions. Care must be exercised in the heating or 

concentrating of solutions containing this compound in the presence of 

reactive amines.

    3.4 The sensitive and selective Thermal Energy Analyzer and the 

reductive Hall detector may be used in place of the nitrogen-phosphorus 

detector when interferences are encountered. The Thermal Energy Analyzer 

offers the highest selectivity of the non-MS detectors.



[[Page 110]]



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

10-12 for the information of the analyst.

    4.2 These nitrosamines are known carcinogens 13-17, 

therefore, utmost care must be exercised in the handling of these 

materials. Nitrosamine reference standards and standard solutions should 

be handled and prepared in a ventilated glove box within a properly 

ventilated room.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flowmeter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are 

included for illustration only.):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnels--2-L and 250-mL, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm 

long x 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Two-ball micro (Kontes K-

569001-0219 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.2.8 Chromatographic column--Approximately 400 mm long x 22 mm ID, 

with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-

420540-0234 or equivalent), for use in Florisil column cleanup 

procedure.

    5.2.9 Chromatographic column--Approximately 300 mm long x 10 mm ID, 

with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-

420540-0213 or equivalent), for use in alumina column cleanup procedure.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2 [deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.6 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with gas 

chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required 

accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and 

strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak 

areas.

    5.6.1 Column 1--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 10% Carbowax 

20 M/2% KOH on Chromosorb W-AW (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column 

was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. 

Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in 

Section 12.2.

    5.6.2 Column 2--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 10% SP-2250 

on Supel- coport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.6.3 Detector--Nitrogen-phosphorus, reductive Hall, or Thermal 

Energy Analyzer detector. 1, 2 These detectors have proven 

effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in 

the scope (Section 1.1). A nitrogen-phosphorus detector was used to 

develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for 

the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.2.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 ml.



[[Page 111]]



    6.3 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent 

water.

    6.5 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 

400 [deg]C for 4 h in a shallow tray.

    6.6 Hydrochloric acid (1+9)--Add one volume of concentrated HCl 

(ACS) to nine volumes of reagent water.

    6.7 Acetone, methanol, methylene chloride, pentane--Pesticide 

quality or equivalent.

    6.8 Ethyl ether--Nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.

    6.8.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is 

used as indicated by EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from 

Scientific Products Co., Cat No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)

    6.8.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided 

with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative 

must be added to each liter of ether.

    6.9 Florisil--PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 

[deg]F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass 

stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at 

least 16 h at 130 [deg]C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to 

cool.

    6.10 Alumina--Basic activity Super I, W200 series (ICN Life Sciences 

Group, No. 404571, or equivalent). To prepare for use, place 100 g of 

alumina into a 500-mL reagent bottle and add 2 mL of reagent water. Mix 

the alumina preparation thoroughly by shaking or rolling for 10 min and 

let it stand for at least 2 h. The preparation should be homogeneous 

before use. Keep the bottle sealed tightly to ensure proper activity.

    6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in methanol and dilute 

to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the 

convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or 

greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, 

or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to 

those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated 

using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal 

standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with methanol. One of the external standards should be at a concentraton 

near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should 

correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples 

or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare 

a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of 

response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the 

working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through 

the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor 

can be used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with methanol. One of the standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.



[[Page 112]]



    7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. 

Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.





                                                                   RF=      (As)(Cis)    (Ais)(Cs)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------





                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.2) to improve the separations or lower the 

cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the 

method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 20 [micro]g/

mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from 

the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and 

Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available 

from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from 

another external source. If not available from either source above, the 

QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using 

stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 

20 [micro]g/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each 

of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively,



[[Page 113]]



found in Table 2. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the 

acceptance criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis 

of actual samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision 

limit or any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the 

system performance is unacceptable for that parameter. Locate and 

correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters 

of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at 20 [micro]g/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the 

background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever 

concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or 20 [micro]g/L.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were caluclated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\18\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than 20 

[micro]g/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria in 

Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria caluclated for the specific 

spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance crtieria for the 

recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation 

in Table 3, substituting the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) 

calculate overall precision (S') using the equation in Table 3, 

substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike 

concentration as (100 X'/T)  2.44(100 S'/T)%.\18\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices



[[Page 114]]



for use with this method. The specific practices that are most 

productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the 

samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the 

environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of 

a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas 

chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or 

mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should 

analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant 

performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conven 

tional sampling practices \19\ should be followed, except that the 

bottle must not be pre rinsed with sample before collection. Composite 

sam ples should be collected in refrigerated glass containers in 

accordance with the requirements of the program. Automatic sampling 

equipment must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing and other 

potential sources of contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if 

residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter 

of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for 

measurement of residual chlorine.\20\ Field test kits are available for 

this purpose. If N-nitrosodiphenylamine is to be determined, adjust the 

sample pH to 7 to 10 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.\4\

    9.4 Nitrosamines are known to be light sen sitive.\7\ Samples should 

be stored in amber or foil-wrapped bottles in order to minimize 

photolytic decomposition.



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper 

and adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with sodium hydroxide solution 

or sulfuric acid.

    10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min 

with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through 

glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the 

methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

    10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.

    10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) con centrator by attaching a 

10-mL concentra tor tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other 

concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D 

concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.5 Add 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to the combined extracts and 

shake for 2 min. Allow the layers to separate. Pour the combined extract 

through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of 

anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D 

concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of 

methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.

    10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65[deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.7 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 

5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator 

tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed 

immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it 

should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If N-nitro sodi 

phe nylamine is to be measured by gas chromatography, the analyst must 

first use a cleanup column to eliminate diphenylamine interference 

(Section 11). If N-nitrosodiphenylamine is of no interest, the analyst 

may proceed directly with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12).



[[Page 115]]



    10.8 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-

mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other 

appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that 

the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised 

to incorporate the cleanup procedure. Diphenylamine, if present in the 

original sample extract, must be separated from the nitrosamines if N-

nitrosodiphenylamine is to be determined by this method.

    11.2 If the entire extract is to be cleaned up by one of the 

following procedures, it must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the 

concentrator tube in Section 10.7, add a clean boiling chip and attach a 

two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL 

of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micr-K-D apparatus on a hot 

water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is partially 

immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus 

and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 

to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column 

will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent 

volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and 

allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder 

column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL 

of methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 2.0 mL and proceed 

with one of the following cleanup procedures.

    11.3 Florisil column cleanup for nitro samines:

    11.3.1 Place 22 g of activated Florisil into a 22-mm ID 

chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 

about 5 mm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.

    11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of ethyl ether/pentane 

(15+85)(V/V). Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the 

sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2-mL sample 

extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of pentane to complete 

the transfer.

    11.3.3 Elute the column with 90 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (15+85)(V/

V) and discard the eluate. This fraction will contain the diphenylamine, 

if it is present in the extract.

    11.3.4 Next, elute the column with 100 mL of acetone/ethyl ether 

(5+95)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator 

tube. This fraction will contain all of the nitrosamines listed in the 

scope of the method.

    11.3.5 Add 15 mL of methanol to the collected fraction and 

concentrate as in Section 10.6, except use pentane to prewet the column 

and set the water bath at 70 to 75 [deg]C. When the apparatus is cool, 

remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into 

the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of pentane. Analyze by gas 

chromatography (Section 12).

    11.4 Alumina column cleanup for nitro samines:

    11.4.1 Place 12 g of the alumina preparation (Section 6.10) into a 

10-mm ID chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the alumina 

and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.

    11.4.2 Preelute the column with 10 mL of ethyl ether/pentane 

(3+7)(V/V). Discard the eluate (about 2 mL) and just prior to exposure 

of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2 mL 

sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of pentane to 

complete the transfer.

    11.4.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the 

air, add 70 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (3+7)(V/V). Discard the first 10 

mL of eluate. Collect the remainder of the eluate in a 500-mL K-D flask 

equipped with a 10 mL concentrator tube. This fraction contains N-

nitrosodiphenylamine and probably a small amount of N-nitrosodi-n-

propylamine.

    11.4.4 Next, elute the column with 60 mL of ethyl ether/pentane 

(1+1)(V/V), collecting the eluate in a second K-D flask equipped with a 

10-mL concentrator tube. Add 15 mL of methanol to the K-D flask. This 

fraction will contain N-nitrosodimethylamine, most of the N-nitrosodi-n-

propylamine and any diphenylamine that is present.

    11.4.5 Concentrate both fractions as in Section 10.6, except use 

pentane to prewet the column. When the apparatus is cool, remove the 

Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the 

concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of pentane. Analyze the fractions by 

gas chromatography (Section 12).



                         12. Gas Chromatography



    12.1 N-nitrosodiphenylamine completely reacts to form diphenylamine 

at the normal operating temperatures of a GC injection port (200 to 250 

[deg]C). Thus, N-nitro sodi phenylamine is chromatographed and detected 

as di phe nyla mine. Accurate determination depends on removal of di phe 

nyla mine that may be present in the original extract prior to GC 

analysis (See Section 11).

    12.2 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL 

that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations 

achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or 

capillary



[[Page 116]]



(open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be 

used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    12.3 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.4 If the extract has not been subjected to one of the cleanup 

procedures in Section 11, it is necessary to exchange the solvent from 

methylene chloride to methanol before the thermionic detector can be 

used. To a 1 to 10-mL volume of methylene chloride extract in a 

concentrator tube, add 2 mL of methanol and a clean boiling chip. Attach 

a two-ball micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube. Prewet the 

column by adding about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place 

the micro-K-D apparatus on a boiling (100 [deg]C) water bath so that the 

concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the 

vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required 

to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 

about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool 

for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of methanol. Adjust the 

final volume to 2.0 mL.

    12.5 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    12.6 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.\21\ Smaller 

(1.0 [micro]L) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are 

employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and 

the resulting peak size in area or peak height units.

    12.7 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    12.8 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    12.9 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.105



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.106



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\3\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\22\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually 

achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 4 x MDL to 1000 x MDL.\22\

    14.3 This method was tested by 17 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations



[[Page 117]]



over the range 0.8 to 55 [micro]g/L.\23\ Single operator precision, 

overall precision, and method accuracy were found to be directly related 

to the concentration of the parameter and essentially independent of the 

sample matrix. Linear equations to describe these relationships are 

presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. Fine, D.H., Lieb, D., and Rufeh, R. ``Principle of Operation of 

the Thermal Energy Analyzer for the Trace Analysis of Volatile and Non-

volatile N-nitroso Compounds,'' Journal of Chromatography, 107, 351 

(1975).

    2. Fine, D.H., Hoffman, F., Rounbehler, D.P., and Belcher, N.M. 

``Analysis of N-nitroso Compounds by Combined High Performance Liquid 

Chromatography and Thermal Energy Analysis,'' Walker, E.A., Bogovski, P. 

and Griciute, L., Editors, N-nitroso Compounds--Analysis and Formation, 

Lyon, International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC Scientific 

Publications No. 14), pp. 43-50 (1976).

    3. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    4. ``Determination of Nitrosamines in Industrial and Municipal 

Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-82-016, National Technical Information Service, 

PB82-199621, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.

    5. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    6. Buglass, A.J., Challis, B.C., and Osborn, M.R. ``Transnitrosation 

and Decomposition of Nitrosamines,'' Bogovski, P. and Walker, E.A., 

Editors, N-nitroso Compounds in the Environment, Lyon, International 

Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC Scientific Publication No. 9), pp. 

94-100 (1974).

    7. Burgess, E.M., and Lavanish, J.M. ``Photochemical Decomposition 

of N-nitrosamines,'' Tetrahedon Letters, 1221 (1964)

    8. Druckrey, H., Preussmann, R., Ivankovic, S., and Schmahl, D. 

``Organotrope Carcinogene Wirkungen bei 65 Verschiedenen N-

NitrosoVerbindungen an BD-Ratten,'' Z. Krebsforsch., 69, 103 (1967).

    9. Fiddler, W. ``The Occurrence and Determination of N-nitroso 

Compounds,'' Toxicol. Appl. Pharmacol., 31, 352 (1975).

    10. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    11. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

Part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    12. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    13. Lijinsky, W. ``How Nitrosamines Cause Cancer,'' New Scientist, 

73, 216 (1977).

    14. Mirvish, S.S. ``N-Nitroso compounds: Their Chemical and in vivo 

Formation and Possible Importance as Environmental Carcinogens,'' J. 

Toxicol. Environ. Health, 3, 1267 (1977).

    15. ``Reconnaissance of Environmental Levels of Nitrosamines in the 

Central United States,'' EPA-330/1-77-001, National Enforcement 

Investigations Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1977).

    16. ``Atmospheric Nitrosamine Assessment Report,'' Office of Air 

Quality Planning and Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 

Research Triangle Park, North Carolina (1976).

    17. ``Scientific and Technical Assessment Report on Nitrosamines,'' 

EPA-660/6-7-001, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency (1976).

    18. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value of 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    19. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    20. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    21. Burke, J. A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue 

Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of 

Official Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    22. ``Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies EPA 

Methods 606, 607, and 608,'' Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-

03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring 

and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.

    23. ``EPA Method Study 17 Method 607--Nitrosamines,'' EPA 600/4-84-

051, National Technical Information Service, PB84-207646, Springfield, 

Virginia 22161, June 1984.



[[Page 118]]







     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                     Retention time (min)       Method

                                  --------------------------  detection

            Parameter                                           limit

                                     Column 1     Column 2    ([micro]g/

                                                                  L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

N-Nitrosodimethylamine...........          4.1         0.88         0.15

N-Nitrosodi-n-propylamine........         12.1          4.2          .46

N-Nitrosodiphenylamine \a\.......     \b\ 12.8      \c\ 6.4          .81

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Column 1 conditions: Chromosorb W-AW (80/100 mesh) coated with 10%

  Carbowax 20 M/2% KOH packed in a 1.8 m long x 4mm ID glass column with

  helium carrier gas at 40 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held

  isothermal at 110 [deg]C, except where otherwise indicated.

Column 2 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 10% SP-2250

  packed in a 1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass column with helium carrier gas

  at 40 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held isothermal at 120

  [deg]C, except where otherwise indicated.

\a\ Measured as diphenylamine.

\b\ 220 [deg]C column temperature.

\c\ 210 [deg]C column temperature.





                                   Table 2--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 607

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                                        Range for X

                                                               Test conc.  Limit for s   ([micro]g/   Range for

                          Parameter                            ([micro]g/   ([micro]g/       L)         P, Ps

                                                                   L)           L)                    (percent)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

N-Nitrosodimethylamine......................................           20          3.4     4.6-20.0       13-109

N-Nitrosodiphenyl...........................................           20          6.1     2.1-24.5        D-139

N-Nitrosodi-n-propylamine...................................           20          5.7    11.5-26.8       45-146

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s=Standard deviation for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 607

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                   Accuracy, as   Single analyst      Overall

                            Parameter                              recovery, X'   precision, sr'   precision, S'

                                                                   ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)    ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

N-Nitrosodimethylamine..........................................      0.37C+0.06      0.25X-0.04      0.25X+0.11

N-Nitrosodiphenylamine..........................................      0.64C+0.52      0.36X-1.53      0.46X-0.47

N-Nitrosodi-n-propylamine.......................................      0.96C-0.07      0.15X+0.13      0.21X+0.15

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 119]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.017





[[Page 120]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.018





[[Page 121]]



             Method 608--Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain organochlorine 

pesticides and PCBs. The following parameters can be determined by this 

method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                  Parameter                    STORET No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Aldrin......................................         39330      309-00-2

[alpha]-BHC.................................         39337      319-84-6

[beta]-BHC..................................         39338      319-85-7

[delta]-BHC.................................         34259      319-86-8

[gamma]-BHC.................................         39340       58-89-9

Chlordane...................................         39350       57-74-9

4,4'-DDD....................................         39310       72-54-8

4,4'-DDE....................................         39320       72-55-9

4,4'-DDT....................................         39300       50-29-3

Dieldrin....................................         39380       60-57-1

Endosulfan I................................         34361      959-98-8

Endosulfan II...............................         34356    33212-65-9

Endosulfan sulfate..........................         34351     1031-07-8

Eldrin......................................         39390       72-20-8

Endrin aldehyde.............................         34366     7421-93-4

Heptachlor..................................         39410       76-44-8

Heptachlor epoxide..........................         39420     1024-57-3

Toxaphene...................................         39400     8001-35-2

PCB-1016....................................         34671    12674-11-2

PCB-1221....................................         39488     1104-28-2

PCB-1232....................................         39492    11141-16-5

PCB-1242....................................         39496    53469-21-9

PCB-1248....................................         39500    12672-29-6

PCB-1254....................................         39504    11097-69-1

PCB-1260....................................         39508    11096-82-5

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the 

determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial 

discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to 

analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, 

compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a 

second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm 

measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas 

chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the 

qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the 

parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)\1\ for 

each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific wastewater 

may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature of interferences 

in the sample matrix.

    1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are 

essentially the same as in Methods 606, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a 

single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the 

scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the 

concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, 

as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is 

allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic 

conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations 

of these parameters.

    1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the 

interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the 

ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene 

chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration 

to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas 

chromatography and the parameters are then measured with an electron 

capture detector.\2\

    2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure and an 

elemental sulfur removal procedure to aid in the elimination of 

interferences that may be encountered.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.\3\ Clean all glassware 

as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used in 

it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with hot 

water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such as PCBs, may not 

be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and 

pesticide quality hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace 

heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually eliminates PCB 

interference. Volumetric ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. 

After drying and cooling, glassware should be sealed and stored in a 

clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or other 

contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.



[[Page 122]]



    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Interferences by phthalate esters can pose a major problem in 

pesticide analysis when using the electron capture detector. These 

compounds generally appear in the chromatogram as large late eluting 

peaks, especially in the 15 and 50% fractions from Florisil. Common 

flexible plastics contain varying amounts of phthalates. These 

phthalates are easily extracted or leached from such materials during 

laboratory operations. Cross contamination of clean glassware routinely 

occurs when plastics are handled during extraction steps, especially 

when solvent-wetted surfaces are handled. Interferences from phthalates 

can best be minimized by avoiding the use of plastics in the laboratory. 

Exhaustive cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to 

eliminate background phthalate contamination.4, 5 The 

interferences from phthalate esters can be avoided by using a 

microcoulometric or electrolytic conductivity detector.

    3.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these 

interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup 

approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

6-8 for the information of the analyst.

    4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been 

tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian 

carcinogens: 4,4'-DDT, 4,4'-DDD, the BHCs, and the PCBs. Primary 

standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A 

NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst 

handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during composting. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2. Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers 

are included for illustration only.):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnel--2-L, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm 

long x 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Chromatographic column--400 mm long x 22 mm ID, with Teflon 

stopcock and coarse frit filter disc (Kontes K-42054 or equivalent).

    5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna/Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2 [deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.6 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with gas 

chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required 

accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and 

strip-



[[Page 123]]



chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.6.1 Column 1--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.5% SP-

2250/1.95% SP-2401 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This 

column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 

14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in 

Section 12.1.

    5.6.2 Column 2--1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-1 on 

Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.6.3 Detector--Electron capture detector. This detector has proven 

effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in 

the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance 

statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors 

are provided in Section 12.1.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.3 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL to 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent 

water.

    6.5 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methylene chloride--Pesticide 

quality or equivalent.

    6.6 Ethyl ether--Nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.

    6.6.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is 

used as indicated by EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from 

Scientific Products Co., Cat. No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)

    6.6.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided 

with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative 

must be added to each liter of ether.

    6.7 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 

400 [deg]C for 4 h in a shallow tray.

    6.8 Florisil--PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 

[deg]F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass 

stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at 

least 16 h at 130 [deg]C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to 

cool.

    6.9 Mercury--Triple distilled.

    6.10 Copper powder--Activated.

    6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in isooctane and dilute 

to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the 

convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or 

greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, 

or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to 

those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated 

using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal 

standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with isooctane. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare 

a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of 

response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the 

working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through 

the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor 

can be used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can



[[Page 124]]



be suggested that is applicable to all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with isooctane. One of the standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. 

Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.107



                                                              Equation 1

where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentraton of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, the test must 

be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 The cleanup procedure in Section 11 utilizes Florisil column 

chromatography. Florisil from different batches or sources may vary in 

adsorptive capacity. To standardize the amount of Florisil which is 

used, the use of lauric acid value \9\ is suggested. The referenced 

procedure determines the adsorption from hexane solution of lauric acid 

(mg) per g of Florisil. The amount of Florisil to be used for each 

column is calculated by dividing 110 by this ratio and multiplying by 20 

g.

    7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the 

cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the 

method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.



[[Page 125]]



    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each single-component parameter of interest at the following 

concentrations in acetone: 4,4'-DDD, 10 [micro]g/mL; 4,4'-DDT, 10 

[micro]g/mL; endosulfan II, 10 [micro]g/mL; endosulfan sulfate, 10 

[micro]g/mL; endrin, 10 [micro]g/mL; any other single-component 

pesticide, 2 [micro]g/mL. If this method is only to be used to analyze 

for PCBs, chlordane, or toxaphene, the QC check sample concentrate 

should contain the most representative multicomponent parameter at a 

concentration of 50 [micro]g/mL in acetone. The QC check sample 

concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection 

Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, 

Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check 

sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not 

available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must 

be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared 

independently from those used for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test 

concentrations shown in Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample 

concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/mL; and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/mL, for each 

parameter using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 3. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Table 3 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of 

the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 

8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.

    8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the 

test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those 

parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will 

confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, 

locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all 

compmunds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 

times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 

8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\10\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than the test 

concentration in Section 8.2.2, the analyst must use either the QC 

acceptance criteria in Table 3, or optional QC acceptance criteria 

calculated for the specific spike concentration. To calculate optional 

acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate 

accuracy (X') using the equation in Table 4, substituting the spike 

concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S') using the 

equation in Table 4, substituting X'



[[Page 126]]



for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike concentration 

as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/T)%.\10\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 3 must be measured 

in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC 

check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check 

standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standards to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

3. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2 sp to P+2 sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices \11\ should be followed, except that the bottle must 

not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite samples should 

be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the 

requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as 

free as possible of Tygon tubing and other potential sources of 

contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction. If the samples will not be 

extracted within 72 h of collection, the sample should be adjusted to a 

pH range of 5.0 to 9.0 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid. 

Record the volume of acid or base used. If aldrin is to be determined, 

add sodium thiosulfate when residual chlorine is present. EPA Methods 

330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.\12\ 

Field test kits are available for this purpose.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.\2\



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel.

    10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 

min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phase separation. The optium technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through 

glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the 

methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.



[[Page 127]]



    10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.

    10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-

mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration 

devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying 

column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect 

the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and 

column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the 

quantitative transfer.

    10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.7 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to about 80 

[deg]C. Momeltarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a 

new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Concentrate the 

extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The 

elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.

    10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL 

syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube 

and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed 

immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it 

should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample 

extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chroma tographic 

analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed 

to Sec tion 11.

    10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other 

appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that 

the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised 

to incorporate the cleanup procedure. The Florisil column allows for a 

select fractionation of the compounds and will eliminate polar 

interferences. Elemental sulfur, which interferes with the electron 

capture gas chromatography of certain pesticides, can be removed by the 

technique described in Section 11.3.

    11.2 Florisil column cleanup:

    11.2.1 Place a weight of Florisil (nominally 20 g) predetermined by 

calibration (Section 7.5), into a chromatographic column. Tap the column 

to settle the Florisil and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to 

the top.

    11.2.2 Add 60 mL of hexane to wet and rinse the sodium sulfate and 

Florisil. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, 

stop the elution of the hexane by closing the stopcock on the 

chromatographic column. Discard the eluate.

    11.2.3 Adjust the sample extract volume to 10 mL with hexane and 

transfer it from the K-D concentrator tube onto the column. Rinse the 

tube twice with 1 to 2 mL of hexane, adding each rinse to the column.

    11.2.4 Place a 500-mL K-D flask and clean concentrator tube under 

the chroma tographic column. Drain the column into the flask until the 

sodium sulfate layer is nearly exposed. Elute the column with 200 mL of 

6% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 1) at a rate of about 5 mL/min. 

Remove the K-D flask and set it aside for later concentration. Elute the 

column again, using 200 mL of 15% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 

2), into a second K-D flask. Perform the third elution using 200 mL of 

50% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 3). The elution patterns for 

the pesticides and PCBs are shown in Table 2.

    11.2.5 Concentrate the fractions as in Section 10.6, except use 

hexane to prewet the column and set the water bath at about 85 [deg]C. 

When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask 

and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with hexane. Adjust the 

volume of each fraction to 10 mL with hexane and analyze by gas 

chromatography (Section 12).

    11.3 Elemental sulfur will usually elute entirely in Fraction 1 of 

the Florisil column cleanup. To remove sulfur interference from this 

fraction or the original extract, pipet 1.00 mL of the concentrated 

extract into a clean concentrator tube or Teflon-sealed vial. Add one to 

three drops of mercury and seal.\13\ Agitate the contents of the vial 

for 15 to 30 s. Prolonged shaking (2 h) may be required. If so, this may 

be accomplished with a reciprocal shaker. Alternatively, activated



[[Page 128]]



copper powder may be used for sulfur removal.\14\ Analyze by gas 

chromatography.



                         12. Gas Chromatography



    12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL 

that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations 

achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 to 10. Other packed or 

capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or 

detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    12.4 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.\15\ Smaller 

(1.0 uL) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are employed. 

Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, the total 

extract volume, and the resulting peak size in area or peak height 

units.

    12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.108



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.109



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 When it is apparent that two or more PCB (Aroclor) mixtures are 

present, the Webb and McCall procedure \16\ may be used to identify and 

quantify the Aroclors.

    13.3 For multicomponent mixtures (chlordane, toxaphene, and PCBs) 

match retention times of peaks in the standards with peaks in the 

sample. Quantitate every identifiable peak unless interference with 

individual peaks persist after cleanup. Add peak height or peak area of 

each identified peak in the chromatogram. Calculate as total response in 

the sample versus total response in the standard.

    13.4 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\1\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\17\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually 

achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 4xMDL to 1000xMDL with the following 

exceptions: Chlordane recovery at 4xMDL was low (60%); Toxaphene 

recovery was demonstrated linear over the range of 10xMDL to 

1000xMDL.\17\

    14.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial



[[Page 129]]



wastewaters spiked at six concentrations.\18\ Concentrations used in the 

study ranged from 0.5 to 30 [micro]g/L for single-component pesticides 

and from 8.5 to 400 [micro]g/L for multicomponent parameters. Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 4.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Pesticides and PCBs in Industrial and 

Municipal Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-82-023, National Technical 

Information Service, PB82-214222, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 

1982.

    3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S., and Nef, G.S., ``Sensitive Method for 

Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota 

Samples,'' Analytical Chemistry, 47, 2225 (1975).

    5. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S. ``Control of Blanks in the Analysis of 

Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples,'' U.S. National Bureau of 

Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.

    6. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    7. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    8. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    9. Mills, P.A. ``Variation of Florisil Activity: Simple Method for 

Measuring Absorbent Capacity and Its Use in Standardizing Florisil 

Columns,'' Journal of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, 

51, 29, (1968).

    10. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    11. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    12. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    13. Goerlitz, D.F., and Law, L.M. Bulletin for Environmental 

Contamination and Toxicology, 6, 9 (1971).

    14. ``Manual of Analytical Methods for the Analysis of Pesticides in 

Human and Environmental Samples,'' EPA-600/8-80-038, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Health Effects Research Laboratory, Research Triangle 

Park, North Carolina.

    15. Burke, J.A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; 

Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of Official 

Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    16. Webb, R.G., and McCall, A.C. ``Quantitative PCB Standards for 

Election Capture Gas Chromatography,'' Journal of Chromatographic 

Science, 11, 366 (1973).

    17. ``Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies, EPA 

Methods 606, 607, and 608,'' Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-

03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring 

and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.

    18. ``EPA Method Study 18 Method 608--Organochlorine Pesticides and 

PCBs,'' EPA 600/4-84-061, National Technical Information Service, PB84-

211358, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.



     Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Retention time (min)        Method

                                --------------------------   detection

           Parameter                                           limit

                                    Col. 1       Col. 2     ([micro]g/L)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

[alpha]-BHC....................         1.35         1.82          0.003

[gamma]-BHC....................         1.70         2.13          0.004

[beta]-BHC.....................         1.90         1.97          0.006

Heptachlor.....................         2.00         3.35          0.003

[delta]-BHC....................         2.15         2.20          0.009

Aldrin.........................         2.40         4.10          0.004

Heptachlor epoxide.............         3.50         5.00          0.083

Endosulfan I...................         4.50         6.20          0.014

4,4'-DDE.......................         5.13         7.15          0.004

Dieldrin.......................         5.45         7.23          0.002

Endrin.........................         6.55         8.10          0.006



[[Page 130]]





4,4'-DDD.......................         7.83         9.08          0.011

Endosulfan II..................         8.00         8.28          0.004

4,4'-DDT.......................         9.40        11.75          0.012

Endrin aldehyde................        11.82         9.30          0.023

Endosulfan sulfate.............        14.22        10.70          0.066

Chlordane......................        mr           mr             0.014

Toxaphene......................        mr           mr             0.24

PCB-1016.......................        mr           mr            nd

PCB-1221.......................        mr           mr            nd

PCB-1232.......................        mt           mr            nd

PCB-1242.......................        mr           mr             0.065

PCB-1248.......................        mr           mr            nd

PCB-1254.......................        mr           mr            nd

PCB-1260.......................        mr           mr            nd

------------------------------------------------------------------------

 AColumn 1 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 1.5% SP-

  2250/1.95% SP-2401 packed in a 1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass column with

  5% methane/95% argon carrier gas at 60 mL/min flow rate. Column

  temperature held isothermal at 200 [deg]C, except for PCB-1016 through

  PCB-1248, should be measured at 160 [deg]C.

 AColumn 2 conditions: Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) coated with 3% OV-1

  packed in a 1.8 m long x 4 mm ID glass column with 5% methane/95%

  argon carrier gas at 60 mL/min flow rate. Column temperature held

  isothermal at 200 [deg]C for the pesticides; at 140 [deg]C for PCB-

  1221 and 1232; and at 170 [deg]C for PCB-1016 and 1242 to 1268.

 Amr=Multiple peak response. See Figures 2 thru 10.

 And=Not determined.





 Table 2--Distribution of Chlorinated Pesticides and PCBs into Florisil

                           Column Fractions 2

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                      Percent recovery by fraction \a\

            Parameter             --------------------------------------

                                        1            2            3

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Aldrin...........................          100  ...........  ...........

[alpha]-BHC......................          100  ...........  ...........

[beta]-BHC.......................           97  ...........  ...........

[delta]-BHC......................           98  ...........  ...........

[gamma]-BHC......................          100  ...........  ...........

Chlordane........................          100  ...........  ...........

4,4'-DDD.........................           99  ...........  ...........

4,4'-DDE.........................           98  ...........  ...........

4,4'-DDT.........................          100  ...........  ...........

Dieldrin.........................            0          100  ...........

Endosulfan I.....................           37           64  ...........

Endosulfan II....................            0            7           91

Endosulfan sulfate...............            0            0          106

Endrin...........................            4           96  ...........

Endrin aldehyde..................            0           68           26

Heptachlor.......................          100  ...........  ...........

Heptachlor epoxide...............          100  ...........  ...........

Toxaphene........................           96  ...........  ...........

PCB-1016.........................           97  ...........  ...........

PCB-1221.........................           97  ...........  ...........

PCB-1232.........................           95            4  ...........

PCB-1242.........................           97  ...........  ...........

PCB-1248.........................          103  ...........  ...........

PCB-1254.........................           90  ...........  ...........

PCB-1260.........................           95  ...........  ...........

------------------------------------------------------------------------

\a\ Eluant composition:

 Fraction 1-6% ethyl ether in hexane.

 Fraction 2-15% ethyl ether in hexane.

 Fraction 3-50% ethyl ether in hexane.





                                   Table 3--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 608

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                                          Range for

                                                               Test conc.   Limit for s       X       Range for

                          Parameter                            ([micro]g/  ([micro]g/L)  ([micro]g/    P, Ps(%)

                                                                   L)                        L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Aldrin......................................................          2.0          0.42  1.08-2.24        42-122

[alpha]-BHC.................................................          2.0          0.48  0.98-2.44        37-134

[beta]-BHC..................................................          2.0          0.64  0.78-2.60        17-147

[delta]-BHC.................................................          2.0          0.72  1.01-2.37        19-140

[gamma]-BHC.................................................          2.0          0.46  0.86-2.32        32-127



[[Page 131]]





Chlordane...................................................         50           10.0   27.6-54.3        45-119

4,4 '-DDD...................................................         10            2.8   4.8-12.6         31-141

4,4 '-DDE...................................................          2.0          0.55  1.08-2.60        30-145

4,4'-DDT....................................................         10            3.6   4.6-13.7         25-160

Dieldrin....................................................          2.0          0.76  1.15-2.49        36-146

Endosulfan I................................................          2.0          0.49  1.14-2.82        45-153

Endosulfan II...............................................         10            6.1   2.2-17.1          D-202

Endosulfan Sulfate..........................................         10            2.7   3.8-13.2         26-144

Endrin......................................................         10            3.7   5.1-12.6         30-147

Heptachlor..................................................          2.0          0.40  0.86-2.00        34-111

Heptachlor epoxide..........................................          2.0          0.41  1.13-2.63        37-142

Toxaphene...................................................         50.0         12.7   27.8-55.6        41-126

PCB-1016....................................................         50           10.0   30.5-51.5        50-114

PCB-1221....................................................         50           24.4   22.1-75.2        15-178

PCB-1232....................................................         50           17.9   14.0-98.5        10-215

PCB-1242....................................................         50           12.2   24.8-69.6        39-150

PCB-1248....................................................         50           15.9   29.0-70.2        38-158

PCB-1254....................................................         50           13.8   22.2-57.9        29-131

PCB-1260....................................................         50           10.4   18.7-54.9         8-127

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 4. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 4.





                Table 4--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 608

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                         Accuracy, as       Single analyst

                      Parameter                          recovery, X'       precision, sr'    Overall precision,

                                                         ([micro]g/L)        ([micro]g/L)       S' ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Aldrin..............................................          0.81C+0.04          0.16X-0.04          0.20X-0.01

[alpha]-BHC.........................................          0.84C+0.03          0.13X+0.04          0.23X-0.00

[beta]-BHC..........................................          0.81C+0.07          0.22X-0.02          0.33X-0.05

[delta]-BHC.........................................          0.81C+0.07          0.18X+0.09          0.25X+0.03

[gamma]-BHC.........................................          0.82C-0.05          0.12X+0.06          0.22X+0.04

Chlordane...........................................          0.82C-0.04          0.13X+0.13          0.18X+0.18

4,4'-DDD............................................          0.84C+0.30          0.20X-0.18          0.27X-0.14

4,4'-DDE............................................          0.85C+0.14          0.13X+0.06          0.28X-0.09

4,4'-DDT............................................          0.93C-0.13          0.17X+0.39          0.31X-0.21

Dieldrin............................................          0.90C+0.02          0.12X+0.19          0.16X+0.16

Endosulfan I........................................          0.97C+0.04          0.10X+0.07          0.18X+0.08

Endosulfan II.......................................          0.93C+0.34         0.41X--0.65          0.47X-0.20

Endosulfan Sulfate..................................          0.89C-0.37          0.13X+0.33          0.24X+0.35

Endrin..............................................          0.89C-0.04          0.20X+0.25          0.24X+0.25

Heptachlor..........................................          0.69C+0.04          0.06X+0.13          0.16X+0.08

Heptachlor epoxide..................................          0.89C+0.10          0.18X-0.11          0.25X-0.08

Toxaphene...........................................          0.80C+1.74          0.09X+3.20          0.20X+0.22

PCB-1016............................................          0.81C+0.50          0.13X+0.15          0.15X+0.45

PCB-1221............................................          0.96C+0.65          0.29X-0.76          0.35X-0.62

PCB-1232............................................         0.91C+10.79          0.21X-1.93          0.31X+3.50

PCB-1242............................................          0.93C+0.70          0.11X+1.40          0.21X+1.52

PCB-1248............................................          0.97C+1.06          0.17X+0.41          0.25X-0.37

PCB-1254............................................          0.76C+2.07          0.15X+1.66          0.17X+3.62

PCB-1260............................................          0.66C+3.76          0.22X-2.37          0.39X-4.86

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 132]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.019





[[Page 133]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.020





[[Page 134]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.021





[[Page 135]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.022





[[Page 136]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.023





[[Page 137]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.024





[[Page 138]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.025





[[Page 139]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.026





[[Page 140]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.027





[[Page 141]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.028



                Method 609--Nitroaromatics and Isophorone



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain nitroaromatics 

and isophorone. The following parameters may be determined by this 

method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                   Parameter                     STORET No.    CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

2,4-Dinitrotoluene............................        34611     121-14-2

2,6-Dinitrotoluene............................        34626     606-20-2

Isophorone....................................        34408      78-59-1

Nitrobenzene..................................        34447      98-95-3

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the 

determination of



[[Page 142]]



the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as 

provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze 

unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound 

identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a 

second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm 

measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas 

chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the 

qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the 

parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)\1\ for 

each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific wastewater 

may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature of interferences 

in the sample matrix.

    1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are 

essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 611, and 612. Thus, a 

single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the 

scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the 

concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, 

as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is 

allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic 

conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations 

of these parameters.

    1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the 

interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the 

ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the 

procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene 

chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration 

to a volume of 10 mL or less. Isophorone and nitrobenzene are measured 

by flame ionization detector gas chromatography (FIDGC). The 

dinitrotoluenes are measured by electron capture detector gas 

chromatography (ECDGC).\2\

    2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure to aid 

in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baseliles in gas chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.\3\ Clean all glassware 

as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used in 

it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with hot 

water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such as PCBs, may not 

be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and 

pesticide quality hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace 

heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents usually eliminates PCB 

interference. Volumetric ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace. 

After drying and cooling, glassware should be sealed and stored in a 

clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or other 

contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these 

interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup 

approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

4-6 for the information of the analyst.



[[Page 143]]



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are 

included for illustration only.):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnel--2-L, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm 

long x 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Chromatographic column--100 mm long x 10 mm ID, with Teflon 

stopcock.

    5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Two-ball micro (Kontes K-

569001-0219 or equivalent).

    5.2.8 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2 [deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.6 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with gas 

chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required 

accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and 

strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak 

areas.

    5.6.1 Column 1--1.2 m long x 2 or 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.95% 

QF-1/1.5% OV-17 on Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column 

was used to develop the method performance statements given in Section 

14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in 

Section 12.1.

    5.6.2 Column 2--3.0 m long x 2 or 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-

101 on Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) or equivalent.

    5.6.3 Detectors--Flame ionization and electron capture detectors. 

The flame ionization detector (FID) is used when determining isophorone 

and nitrobenzene. The electron capture detector (ECD) is used when 

determining the dinitrotoluenes. Both detectors have proven effective in 

the analysis of wastewaters and were used in develop the method 

performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use to 

alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)--Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in 

reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.

    6.3 Sulfuric acid (1+1)--Slowly, add 50 mL of 

H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent 

water.

    6.4 Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride--Pesticide quality 

or equivalent.

    6.5 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 

400 [deg]C for 4 h in a shallow tray.

    6.6 Florisil--PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 

[deg]F and store in dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers 

or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h 

at 200 [deg]C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.

    6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in hexane and dilute to 

volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the 

convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or 

greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the 

concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock 

standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the 

manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles.



[[Page 144]]



Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions 

should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, 

especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.

    6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or 

sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to 

those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated 

using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal 

standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with hexane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration 

near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should 

correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples 

or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare 

a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of 

response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the 

working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD) linearity through 

the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor 

can be used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must 

further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not 

affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these 

limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to 

all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flash. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with hexane. One of the standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 [micro]L, analyze each calibration 

standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area 

responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. 

Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.

    Equation 1.

    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.110

    

where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



    If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the 

RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.

    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to



[[Page 145]]



generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This 

ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the 

cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the 

method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1,5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest in acetone at a concentration of 

20 [micro]g/mL for each dinitrotoluene and 100 [micro]g/mL for 

isophorone and nitrobenzene. The QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If 

not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be 

obtained from another external source. If not available from either 

source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the 

laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used 

for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test 

concentrations shown in Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample 

concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 2. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter. Locate and correct the 

source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest 

beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 

times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 

8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determile background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100 (A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement



[[Page 146]]



of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to 

background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent 

that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.\7\ If 

spiking was performed at a concentration lower than the test 

concentration in Section 8.2.2, the analyst must use either the QC 

acceptance criteria in Table 2, or optional QC acceptance criteria 

calculated for the specific spike concentration. To calculate optional 

acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate 

accuracy (X') using the equation in Table 3, substituting the spike 

concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S') using the 

equation in Table 3, substituting X' for X8; (3) calculate the range for 

recovery at the spike concentration as (100 X'/T) 2.44 (100 S'/T)%.\7\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be 

analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4. If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

2. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for 

wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp = 10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices \8\ should be followed, except that the bottle must 

not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite samples should 

be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the 

requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as 

free as possible of Tygon tubing and other potential sources of 

contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.\2\



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper 

and adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with sodium hydroxide solution 

or sulfuric acid.

    10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 

min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration



[[Page 147]]



of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical 

methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer 

flask.

    10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.

    10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-

mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration 

devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying 

column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect 

the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and 

column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the 

quantitative transfer.

    10.6 Sections 10.7 and 10.8 describe a procedure for exchanging the 

methylene chloride solvent to hexane while concentrating the extract 

volume to 1.0 mL. When it is not necessary to achieve the MDL in Table 

2, the solvent exchange may be made by the addition of 50 mL of hexane 

and concentration to 10 mL as described in Method 606, Sections 10.7 and 

10.8.

    10.7 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 

5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Add 1 to 2 mL of hexane 

and a clean boiling chip to the concentrator tube and attach a two-ball 

micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of hexane 

to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 

[deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot 

water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water 

temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At 

the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively 

chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of 

liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.9 Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into 

the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of hexane. Adjust the 

extract volume to 1.0 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store 

refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If 

the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be 

transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract 

requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis 

(Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 

11.

    10.10 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other 

appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that 

the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised 

to incorporate the cleanup procedure.

    11.2 Florisil column cleanup:

    11.2.1 Prepare a slurry of 10 g of acti vated Florisil in methylene 

chloride/ hexane (1+9)(V/V) and place the Florisil into a 

chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 

cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top. Adjust the elution rate to 

about 2 mL/min.

    11.2.2 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the 

air, quantitatively transfer the sample extract onto the column using an 

additional 2 mL of hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to 

exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 30 mL of methylene 

chloride/hexane (1 + 9)(V/V) and continue the elution of the column. 

Discard the eluate.

    11.2.3 Next, elute the column with 30 mL of acetone/methylene 

chloride (1 + 9)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL 

concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Sections 

10.6, 10.7, 10.8, and 10.9 including the solvent exchange to 1 mL of 

hexane. This fraction should contain the nitroaromatics and isophorone. 

Analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).



                         12. Gas Chromatography



    12.1 Isophorone and nitrobenzene are analyzed by injection of a 

portion of the extract into an FIDGC. The dinitrotoluenes are analyzed 

by a separate injection into an ECDGC. Table 1 summarizes the 

recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph.



[[Page 148]]



Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved 

under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Column 1 

are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) 

columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the 

requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the same extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    12.4 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.\9\ Smaller (1.0 

[micro]L) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are employed. 

Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, the total 

extract volume, and the resulting peak size in area or peak height 

units.

    12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            13. Calculations



    13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.111



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.112



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    13.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         14. Method Performance



    14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\1\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\10\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually 

achieved in a given analysis will vary depending on instrument 

sensitivity and matrix effects.

    14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 7xMDL to 1000xMDL.\10\

    14.3 This method was tested by 18 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 515 [micro]g/L.\11\ Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 3.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Nitroaromatic Compounds and Isophorone in 

Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/ 4-82-024, National 

Technical Information Service, PB82-208398, Springfield, Virginia 22161, 

May 1982.

    3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.



[[Page 149]]



    4. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    9. Burke, J.A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; 

Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of Official 

Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    10. ``Determination of Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve 

for EPA Method 609--Nitroaromatics and Isophorone,'' Special letter 

report for EPA Contract 68-03-2624, U.S. Environmental Protection 

Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, 

Ohio 45268, June 1980.

    11. ``EPA Method Study 19, Method 609 (Nitroaromatics and 

Isophorone),'' EPA 600/4-84-018, National Technical Information Service, 

PB84-176908, Springfield, Virginia 22161, March 1984.



                         Table 1--Chromatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                             Retention time (min)       Method detection limit

                                                         ----------------------------        ([micro]g/L)

                        Parameter                                                    ---------------------------

                                                             Col. 1        Col. 2         ECDGC         FIDGC

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nitrobenzene............................................        3.31          4.31         13.7           3.6

2,6-Dinitrotoluene......................................        3.52          4.75          0.01          -

Isophorone..............................................        4.49          5.72         15.7           5.7

2,4-Dinitrotoluene......................................        5.35          6.54          0.02          -

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

 AAColumn 1 conditions: Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) coated with 1.95% QF-1/1.5% OV-17 packed in a 1.2 m long x 2

  mm or 4 mm ID glass column. A 2 mm ID column and nitrogen carrier gas at 44 mL/min flow rate were used when

  determining isophorone and nitrobenzene by FIDGC. The column temperature was held isothermal at 85 [deg]C. A 4

  mm ID column and 10% methane/90% argon carrier gas at 44 mL/min flow rate were used when determining the

  dinitrotol uenes by ECDGC. The column temperature was held iso thermal at 145 [deg]C.

 AAColumn 2 conditions: Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) coated with 3% OV-101 packed in a 3.0 m long x 2 mm or 4 mm ID

  glass column. A 2 mm ID column and nitrogen carrier gas at 44 mL/min flow rate were used when determining

  isophorone and nitrobenzene by FIDGC. The column temperature was held isothermal at 100 [deg]C. A 4 mm ID

  column and 10% methane/90% argon carrier gas at 44 mL/min flow rate were used when determining the

  dinitrotoluenes by ECDGC. The column temperature was held isothermal at 150 [deg]C.





                                   Table 2--QC Acceptance Criteria--Method 609

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                             Test Conc.                 Range for X

                         Parameter                           ([micro]g/   Limit for s  ([micro]g/L)   Range for

                                                                 L)      ([micro]g/L)                 P, Ps (%)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2,4-Dinitrotoluene........................................           20           5.1  3.6-22.8            6-125

2,6-Dinitrotoluene........................................           20           4.8  3.8-23.0            8-126

Isophorone................................................          100          32.3  8.0-100.0           D-117

Nitrobenzene..............................................          100          33.3  25.7-100.0          6-118

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

s=Standard deviation of four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

X=Average recovery for four recovery measurements, in [micro]g/L (Section 8.2.4).

P, Ps=Percent recovery measured (Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.2).

D=Detected; result must be greater than zero.



Note: These criteria are based directly upon the method performance data in Table 3. Where necessary, the limits

  for recovery have been broadened to assure applicability of the limits to concentrations below those used to

  develop Table 3.





                Table 3--Method Accuracy and Precision as Functions of Concentration--Method 609

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                            Accuracy, as      Single analyst        Overall

                       Parameter                            recovery, X'      precision, sr'     precision, S'

                                                            ([micro]g/L)       ([micro]g/L)       ([micro]g/L)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2,4-Dinitro-

 toluene...............................................         0.65C+0.22         0.20X+0.08         0.37X-0.07

2,6-Dinitro-

 toluene...............................................         0.66C+0.20         0.19X+0.06         0.36X-0.00

Isophorone.............................................         0.49C+2.93         0.28X+2.77         0.46X+0.31

Nitrobenzene...........................................         0.60C+2.00         0.25X+2.53         0.37X-0.78

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

X'=Expected recovery for one or more measurements of a sample containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.

sr'=Expected single analyst standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

S'=Expected interlaboratory standard deviation of measurements at an average concentration found of X, in

  [micro]g/L.

C=True value for the concentration, in [micro]g/L.

X=Average recovery found for measurements of samples containing a concentration of C, in [micro]g/L.





[[Page 150]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.029





[[Page 151]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02JY92.030





[[Page 152]]



              Method 610--Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons



                        1. Scope and Application



    1.1 This method covers the determination of certain polynuclear 

aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH). The following parameters can be determined 

by this method:



------------------------------------------------------------------------

                  Parameter                    STORET No.      CAS No.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Acenaphthene................................         34205       83-32-9

Acenaphthylene..............................         34200      208-96-8

Anthracene..................................         34220      120-12-7

Benzo(a)anthracene..........................         34526       56-55-3

Benzo(a)pyrene..............................         34247       50-32-8

Benzo(b)fluoranthene........................         34230      205-99-2

Benzo(ghi)perylene..........................         34521      191-24-2

Benzo(k)fluoranthene........................         34242      207-08-9

Chrysene....................................         34320      218-01-9

Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene......................         34556       53-70-3

Fluoranthene................................         34376      206-44-0

Fluorene....................................         34381       86-73-7

Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene......................         34403      193-39-5

Naphthalene.................................         34696       91-20-3

Phenanthrene................................         34461       85-01-8

Pyrene......................................         34469      129-00-0

------------------------------------------------------------------------



    1.2 This is a chromatographic method applicable to the determination 

of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as 

provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze 

unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound 

identifications should be supported by at least one additional 

qualitative technique. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass 

spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and 

quantitative confirmation of results for many of the parameters listed 

above, using the extract produced by this method.

    1.3 This method provides for both high performance liquid 

chromatographic (HPLC) and gas chromatographic (GC) approaches for the 

determination of PAHs. The gas chromatographic procedure does not 

adequately resolve the following four pairs of compounds: Anthracene and 

phenanthrene; chrysene and benzo(a)anthracene; benzo(b)fluoranthene and 

benzo(k)fluoranthene; and dibenzo(a,h) anthracene and indeno (1,2,3-

cd)pyrene. Unless the purpose for the analysis can be served by 

reporting the sum of an unresolved pair, the liquid chromatographic 

approach must be used for these compounds. The liquid chromatographic 

method does resolve all 16 of the PAHs listed.

    1.4 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 15.1) \1\ 

for each parameter is listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific 

wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature of 

interferences in the sample matrix.

    1.5 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are 

essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a 

single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the 

scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the 

concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, 

as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. Selection of the 

aliquots must be made prior to the solvent exchange steps of this 

method. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Sections 12 and 13, 

to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous 

measurement of combinations of these parameters.

    1.6 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly 

permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to 

application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 

and 136.5.

    1.7 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of 

analysts experienced in the use of HPLC and GC systems and in the 

interpretation of liquid and gas chromatograms. Each analyst must 

demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method 

using the procedure described in Section 8.2.



                          2. Summary of Method



    2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted 

with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene 

chloride extract is dried and concentrated to a volume of 10 mL or less. 

The extract is then separated by HPLC or GC. Ultraviolet (UV) and 

fluorescence detectors are used with HPLC to identify and measure the 

PAHs. A flame ionization detector is used with GC.\2\

    2.2 The method provides a silica gel column cleanup procedure to aid 

in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.



                            3. Interferences



    3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, 

reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardward that lead to 

discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in the chromatograms. All 

of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from 

interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory 

reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.

    3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.\3\ Clean all glassware 

as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used in 

it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing with hot 

water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware 

should then be drained dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 [deg]C 

for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such as PCBs, may not 

be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and 

pesticide quality hexane may be



[[Page 153]]



substituted for the muffle furnace heating. Thorough rinsing with such 

solvents usually eliminates PCB interference. Volumetric ware should not 

be heated in a muffle furnace. After drying and cooling, glassware 

should be sealed and stored in a clean environment to prevent any 

accumulation of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted or capped 

with aluminum foil.

    3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize 

interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-

glass systems may be required.

    3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-

extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary 

considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and 

diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The 

cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these 

interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup 

approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.

    3.3 The extent of interferences that may be encountered using liquid 

chromatographic techniques has not been fully assessed. Although the 

HPLC conditions described allow for a unique resolution of the specific 

PAH compounds covered by this method, other PAH compounds may interfere.



                                4. Safety



    4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this 

method have not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound 

should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, 

exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level 

by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for 

maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the 

safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference 

file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to 

all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references 

to laboratory safety are available and have been identified 

4-6 for the information of the analyst.

    4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been 

tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian 

carcinogens: benzo(a)anthracene, benzo(a)pyrene, and dibenzo(a,h)-

anthracene. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be 

prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be 

worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic 

compounds.



                       5. Apparatus and Materials



    5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.

    5.1.1 Grab sample bottle--1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a 

screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the 

sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect 

samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with 

acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize 

contamination.

    5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)--The sampler must incorporate 

glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of 

sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 [deg]C and 

protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a 

peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber 

tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should 

be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with 

distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the 

sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow 

proportional composites.

    5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are 

included for illustration only.):

    5.2.1 Separatory funnel--2-L, with Teflon stopcock.

    5.2.2 Drying column--Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm 

long x 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.

    5.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish--10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-

570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes 

employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent 

evaporation of extracts.

    5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish--500-mL (Kontes K-570001-

0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

    5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Three-ball macro (Kontes K-

503000-0121 or equivalent).

    5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish--Two-ball micro (Kontes K-

569001-0219 or equivalent).

    5.2.7 Vials--10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.

    5.2.8 Chromatographic column--250 mm long x 10 mm ID, with coarse 

frit filter disc at bottom and Teflon stopcock.

    5.3 Boiling chips--Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 [deg]C for 

30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.

    5.4 Water bath--Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of 

temperature control (2 [deg]C). The bath should be 

used in a hood.

    5.5 Balance--Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

    5.6 High performance liquid chromatograph (HPLC)--An analytical 

system complete with column supplies, high pressure syringes, detectors, 

and compatible strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for 

measuring peak areas and retention times.

    5.6.1 Gradient pumping system--Constant flow.



[[Page 154]]



    5.6.2 Reverse phase column--HC-ODS Sil-X, 5 micron particle 

diameter, in a 25 cm x 2.6 mm ID stainless steel column (Perkin Elmer 

No. 089-0716 or equivalent). This column was used to develop the method 

performance statements in Section 15. Guidelines for the use of 

alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.2.

    5.6.3 Detectors--Fluorescence and/or UV detectors. The fluorescence 

detector is used for excitation at 280 nm and emission greater than 389 

nm cutoff (Corning 3-75 or equivalent). Fluorometers should have 

dispersive optics for excitation and can utilize either filter or 

dispersive optics at the emission detector. The UV detector is used at 

254 nm and should be coupled to the fluorescence detector. These 

detectors were used to develop the method performance statements in 

Section 15. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided 

in Section 12.2.

    5.7 Gas chromatograph--An analytical system complete with 

temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column or 

splitless injection and all required accessories including syringes, 

analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data 

system is recommended for measuring peak areas.

    5.7.1 Column--1.8 m long x 2 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-17 on 

Chromosorb W-AW-DCMS (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used 

to develop the retention time data in Table 2. Guidelines for the use of 

alternate column packings are provided in Section 13.3.

    5.7.2 Detector--Flame ionization detector. This detector has proven 

effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in 

the scope (Section 1.1), excluding the four pairs of unresolved 

compounds listed in Section 1.3. Guidelines for the use of alternate 

detectors are provided in Section 13.3.



                               6. Reagents



    6.1 Reagent water--Reagent water is defined as a water in which an 

interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.

    6.2 Sodium thiosulfate--(ACS) Granular.

    6.3 Cyclohexane, methanol, acetone, methylene chloride, pentane--

Pesticide quality or equivalent.

    6.4 Acetonitrile--HPLC quality, distilled in glass.

    6.5 Sodium sulfate--(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 

400 [deg]C for 4 h in a shallow tray.

    6.6 Silica gel--100/200 mesh, desiccant, Davison, grade-923 or 

equivalent. Before use, activate for at least 16 h at 130 [deg]C in a 

shallow glass tray, loosely covered with foil.

    6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 [micro]g/[micro]L)--Stock 

standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or 

purchased as certified solutions.

    6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 

0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in acetonitrile and 

dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used 

at the convenience of the analyst. When com pound purity is assayed to 

be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without cor rection to 

calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared 

stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified 

by the manufacturer or by an independent source.

    6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed 

screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 [deg]C and protect from light. Stock 

standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation 

or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards 

from them.

    6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or 

sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.

    6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate--See Section 8.2.1.



                             7. Calibration



    7.1 Establish liquid or gas chroma tog ra phic operating conditions 

equivalent to those given in Table 1 or 2. The chromatographic system 

can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or 

the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).

    7.2 External standard calibration procedure:

    7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume 

with acetonitrile. One of the external standards should be at a 

concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other 

concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations 

found in real samples or should define the working range of the 

detector.

    7.2.2 Using injections of 5 to 25 [micro]L for HPLC and 2 to 5 

[micro]L for GC, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 

12 or 13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or area responses against 

the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration 

curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to 

amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working 

range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the 

origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be 

used in place of a calibration curve.

    7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure--To use this approach, 

the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar 

in analytical behavior to the



[[Page 155]]



compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the 

measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix 

interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be 

suggested that is applicable to all samples.

    7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three 

concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of 

one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration 

standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, 

and dilute to volume with acetonitrile. One of the standards should be 

at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations 

should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real 

samples or should define the working range of the detector.

    7.3.2 Using injections of 5 to 25 [micro]L for HPLC and 2 to 5 

[micro]L for GC, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 

12 or 13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or area responses against 

concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate 

response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.113



                                                              Equation 1



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Cis=Concentration of the internal standard ([micro]g/L).

Cs=Concentration of the parameter to be measured ([micro]g/

L).



If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF 

can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for 

calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a 

calibration curve of response ratios, As/Ais, vs. 

RF.



    7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be 

verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 

calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the 

predicted response by more than 15%, the test must 

be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a new 

calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.

    7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a 

series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate 

elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.



                           8. Quality Control



    8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a 

formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program 

consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an 

ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data 

quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of 

data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with 

established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses 

meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of 

sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control 

check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were 

performed in an in-control mode of operation.

    8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of 

the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this 

method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.

    8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in 

chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in 

Sections 10.4, 11.1, 12.2, and 13.3) to improve the separations or lower 

the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the 

method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.

    8.1.3 Before processing any samples the analyst must analyze a 

reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the 

analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of 

samples is extracted or reagents are changed a reagent water blank must 

be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.

    8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a 

minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data 

quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.

    8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through 

the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of 

the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent 

to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries 

from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.

    8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document 

the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in 

Section 8.5.

    8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and 

precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.

    8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required 

containing each parameter of interest at the following concentrations in 

acetonitrile: 100 [micro]g/mL of any



[[Page 156]]



of the six early-eluting PAHs (naphthalene, acenaphthylene, 

acenaphthene, fluorene, phenanthrene, and anthracene); 5 [micro]g/mL of 

benzo(k)fluoranthene; and 10 [micro]g/mL of any of the other PAHs. The 

QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in 

Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the 

QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external 

source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample 

concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards 

prepared independently from those used for calibration.

    8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test 

concentrations shown in Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample 

concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.

    8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the 

method beginning in Section 10.

    8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in [micro]g/L, and the 

standard deviation of the recovery (s) in [micro]g/L, for each parameter 

using the four results.

    8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding 

acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in 

Table 3. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance 

criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual 

samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or 

any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system 

performance is unacceptable for that parameter.

    Note: The large number of parameters in Table 3 present a 

substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the 

acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.

    8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of 

the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 

8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.

    8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the 

test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those 

parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will 

confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, 

locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all 

compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.

    8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of 

the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. 

For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one 

spiked sample per month is required.

    8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be 

determined as follows:

    8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a 

specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory 

concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times 

higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, 

whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample 

is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the 

spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 

times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 

8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.

    8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before 

spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike 

concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; 

or, if none, (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected 

background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.

    8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background 

concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC 

check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background 

concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL 

of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the 

concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each 

percent recovery (P) as 100 (A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of 

the spike.

    8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the 

corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance 

criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in 

measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a 

spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to 

the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 

5:1.\7\ If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than the test 

concentration in Section 8.2.2, the analyst must use either the QC 

acceptance criteria in Table 3, or optional QC acceptance criteria 

calculated for the specific spike concentration. To calculate optional 

acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter: (1) Calculate 

accuracy (X') using the equation in Table 4, substituting the spike 

concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S') using the 

equation in Table 4, substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for 

recovery at the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)2.44(100 S'/T)%.\7\

    8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for 

recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check 

standard containing each parameter



[[Page 157]]



that failed the critiera must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.

    8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in 

Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed 

must be prepared and analyzed.

    Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard 

will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, 

the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the 

laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 3 must be measured 

in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC 

check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check 

standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.

    8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check 

sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The 

QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed 

criteria in the test in Section 8.3.

    8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration 

measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery 

(Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the standard 

concentration.

    8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each 

parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 

3. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be 

compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter 

falls outside the designated range, the laboratory performance for that 

parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be 

immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that 

parameter in the unspiked sample is suspect and may not be reported for 

regulatory compliance purposes.

    8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy 

for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. 

After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, 

calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of 

the percent recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as 

a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2sp. 

If P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is 

expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy assessment for each parameter 

on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy 

measurements).

    8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality 

assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices 

that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the 

nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the 

precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the 

identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques 

such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element 

detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the 

laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate 

in relevant performance evaluation studies.



            9. Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling



    9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional 

sampling practices \8\ should be followed, except that the bottle must 

not be prerinsed with sample before collection. Composite samples should 

be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the 

requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as 

free as possible of Tygon tubing and other potential sources of 

contamination.

    9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 [deg]C from the 

time of collection until extraction. PAHs are known to be light 

sensitive; therefore, samples, extracts, and standards should be stored 

in amber or foil-wrapped bottles in order to minimize photolytic 

decomposition. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is 

present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix 

well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of 

residual chlorine.\9\ Field test kits are available for this purpose.

    9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and 

completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.\2\



                          10. Sample Extraction



    10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for 

later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L 

separatory funnel.

    10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and 

shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the 

separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 

min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic 

layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the 

emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of 

the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to 

complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the 

sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through 

glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the 

methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

    10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample 

bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the 

extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same 

manner.



[[Page 158]]



    10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-

mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration 

devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if 

the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying 

column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect 

the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and 

column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the 

quantitative transfer.

    10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and 

attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding 

about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on 

a hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded 

surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical 

position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to 

complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of 

distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the 

chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume 

of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min.

    10.7 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower 

joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 

5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator 

tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed 

immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it 

should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial and protected 

from light. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed 

with gas or liquid chromatographic analysis (Section 12 or 13). If the 

sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.

    10.8 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample 

bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated 

cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.



                       11. Cleanup and Separation



    11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean 

sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup 

procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other 

appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that 

the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the methods as revised 

to incorporate the cleanup procedure.

    11.2 Before the silica gel cleanup technique can be utilized, the 

extract solvent must be exchanged to cyclohexane. Add 1 to 10 mL of the 

sample extract (in methylene chloride) and a boiling chip to a clean K-D 

concentrator tube. Add 4 mL of cyclohexane and attach a two-ball micro-

Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding 0.5 mL of methylene chloride 

to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a boiling (100 [deg]C) 

water bath so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the 

hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water 

temperature as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the 

proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively 

chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of the 

liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain 

and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse 

its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of 

cyclohexane. Adjust the extract volume to about 2 mL.

    11.3 Silica gel column cleanup for PAHs:

    11.3.1 Prepare a slurry of 10 g of activiated silica gel in 

methylene chloride and place this into a 10-mm ID chromatographic 

column. Tap the column to settle the silica gel and elute the methylene 

chloride. Add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top of the 

silica gel.

    11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of pentane. The rate for all 

elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to 

exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, transfer the 2-mL 

cyclohexane sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL 

cyclohexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the 

sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 25 mL of pentane and continue the 

elution of the column. Discard this pentane eluate.

    11.3.3 Next, elute the column with 25 mL of methylene chloride/

pentane (4+6)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL 

concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction to less than 10 mL 

as in Section 10.6. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column 

and rinse the flask and its lower joint with pentane. Proceed with HPLC 

or GC analysis.



               12. High Performance Liquid Chromatography



    12.1 To the extract in the concentrator tube, add 4 mL of 

acetonitrile and a new boiling chip, then attach a two-ball micro-Snyder 

column. Concentrate the solvent as in Section 10.6, except set the water 

bath at 95 to 100 [deg]C. When the apparatus is cool, remove the micro-

Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 

about 0.2 mL of acetonitrile. Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL.

    12.2 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

HPLC. Included in this table are retention times, capacity factors, and 

MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. The UV detector is 

recommended for the determination of naphthalene, acenaphthylene, 

acenapthene, and



[[Page 159]]



fluorene and the fluorescence detector is recommended for the remaining 

PAHs. Examples of the separations achieved by this HPLC column are shown 

in Figures 1 and 2. Other HPLC columns, chromatographic conditions, or 

detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    12.3 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.

    12.4 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the instrument.

    12.5 Inject 5 to 25 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the HPLC using a high pressure syringe or a constant volume sample 

injection loop. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.1 [micro]L, 

and the resulting peak size in area or peak height units. Re-equilibrate 

the HPLC column at the initial gradient conditions for at least 10 min 

between injections.

    12.6 Identify the parameters in the sam ple by comparing the 

retention time of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the 

peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window 

used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual 

retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three 

times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be 

used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of 

the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.

    12.7 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract with acetonitrile and reanalyze.

    12.8 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                         13. Gas Chromatography



    13.1 The packed column GC procedure will not resolve certain 

isomeric pairs as indicated in Section 1.3 and Table 2. The liquid 

chromatographic procedure (Section 12) must be used for these 

parameters.

    13.2 To achieve maximum sensitivity with this method, the extract 

must be concentrated to 1.0 mL. Add a clean boiling chip to the 

methylene chloride extract in the concentrator tube. Attach a two-ball 

micro-Snyder column. Prewet the micro-Snyder column by adding about 0.5 

mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a 

hot water bath (60 to 65 [deg]C) so that the concentrator tube is 

partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the 

apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the 

concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the 

balls will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the 

apparent volume of liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and 

allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder 

column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a 

minimum amount of methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 1.0 mL 

and stopper the concentrator tube.

    13.3 Table 2 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the 

gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times that were 

obtained under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved 

by this column is shown in Figure 3. Other packed or capillary (open-

tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used 

if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.

    13.4 Calibrate the gas chromatographic system daily as described in 

Section 7.

    13.5 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, 

the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed 

thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.

    13.6 Inject 2 to 5 [micro]L of the sample extract or standard into 

the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.\10\ Smaller 

(1.0 [micro]L) volumes may be injected if automatic devices are 

employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 [micro]L, and 

the resulting peak size in area or peak height units.

    13.7 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the 

retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of 

the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time 

window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of 

actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. 

Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound 

can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the 

experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of 

chromatograms.

    13.8 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the 

system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

    13.9 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the 

presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.



                            14. Calculations



    14.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the 

sample.

    14.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using 

the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. 

The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.



[[Page 160]]



[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.114



                                                              Equation 2



where:

A=Amount of material injected (ng).

Vi=Volume of extract injected ([micro]L).

Vt=Volume of total extract ([micro]L).

Vs=Volume of water extracted (mL).



    13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, 

calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) 

determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC15NO91.115



                                                              Equation 3



where:

As=Response for the parameter to be measured.

Ais=Response for the internal standard.

Is=Amount of internal standard added to each extract 

([micro]g).

Vo=Volume of water extracted (L).



    14.2 Report results in [micro]g/L without correction for recovery 

data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.



                         15. Method Performance



    15.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum 

concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% 

confidence that the value is above zero.\1\ The MDL concentrations 

listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.\11\ Similar results 

were achieved using representative wastewaters. MDL for the GC approach 

were not determined. The MDL actually achieved in a given analysis will 

vary depending on instrument sensitivity and matrix effects.

    15.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery 

from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the 

concentration range from 8 x MDL to 800 x MDL\11\ with the following 

exception: benzo(ghi)perylene recovery at 80 x and 800 x MDL were low 

(35% and 45%, respectively).

    15.3 This method was tested by 16 laboratories using reagent water, 

drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked 

at six concentrations over the range 0.1 to 425 [micro]g/L.\12\ Single 

operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to 

be directly related to the concentration of the parameter and 

essentially independent of the sample matrix. Linear equations to 

describe these relationships are presented in Table 4.



                               References



    1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.

    2. ``Determination of Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons in 

Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,'' EPA 600/4-82-025, National 

Technical Information Service, PB82-258799, Springfield, Virginia 22161, 

June 1982.

    3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. ``Standard 

Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of 

Organic Constituents,'' American Society for Testing and Materials, 

Philadelphia.

    4. ``Carcinogens--Working With Carcinogens,'' Department of Health, 

Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease 

Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, 

Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.

    5. ``OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,'' (29 CFR 

part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 

(Revised, January 1976).

    6. ``Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,'' American Chemical 

Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.

    7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. ``Interpretation of Percent 

Recovery Data,'' American Laboratory, 15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 

used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 

derived in this report.)

    8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. ``Standard 

Practices for Sampling Water,'' American Society for Testing and 

Materials, Philadelphia.

    9. ``Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 

(Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,'' Methods for 

Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support 

Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.

    10. Burke, J.A. ``Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; 

Some Practical Aspects,'' Journal of the Association of Official 

Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).

    11. Cole, T., Riggin, R., and Glaser, J. ``Evaluation of Method 

Detection Limits and Analytical Curve for EPA Method 610--PNAs,'' 

International Symposium on Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons, 5th, 

Battelle's Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio (1980).

    12. ``EPA Method Study 20, Method 610 (PNA's),'' EPA 600/4-84-063, 

National Technical Information Service, PB84-211614, Springfield, 

Virginia 22161, June 1984.



[[Page 161]]